JP2019141475A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine with an improved presentation effect.SOLUTION: When a super ready-to-win A is to occur, as shown at (C), a character 31AK001, which is a friendly character, is displayed in an image display device 5 and a ready-to-win presentation is started. When a prescribed time is elapsed from a start of the ready-to-win presentation, such as a termination of an introduction portion of the ready-to-win presentation, a title 31AK002 of the super ready-to-win A is displayed across the whole screen of the image display device 5 as shown at (D), and from a speaker 8, a sound corresponding to the title name of the ready-to-win is outputted. Thereby, the title of the super ready-to-win A is notified.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  A gaming machine that displays a title for informing the type of reach effect at the start of the reach effect has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-101428

  In a gaming machine as described in Patent Document 1, it is desired to enhance the effect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described actual situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with enhanced rendering effects.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention provides:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests that it is controlled to the advantageous state;
Title notification means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of notifying the title corresponding to the suggestion effect,
The title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 9D and 9F).
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects,
In the plurality of types of suggestion effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be executed in a common manner (for example, FIG. 9C).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus on which suggestion effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

(3) In the above gaming machine (1) or (2),
At a plurality of execution timings during execution of the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a notice effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state,
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is notified.

(4) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (3),
The suggestion effect execution means executes at least a first suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of Super Reach A or Super Reach B) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of Super Reach D or Super Reach E) as the suggestion effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notification unit may notify a title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a structure, since the notification of the title according to the suggestion effect can be executed, the effect of the effect is improved.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above,
You may make it the ratio by which the case where the said 1st suggestion effect is performed is controlled to the said advantageous state is higher than the case where the said 2nd suggestion effect is performed.
According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

(6) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (5),
The suggestion effect executing means may be capable of executing the suggestion effect in an effect mode related to a title notified during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

(7) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (6),
A detection means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting a player's action;
Specific display execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) that performs specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means,
The specific display executing means includes
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) that are more advantageous to the player than the first specific display are displayed. Is possible,
In the non-valid period of detection by the detection means, after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 17 (E), FIG. 18 (I)),
An operational effect using the second specific display after the change may be executed in the effective period of detection by the detection means (for example, FIGS. 18J and 18K).
According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

(8) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (7),
As a suggestion display that suggests the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, a first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (display by the first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed during the shutter effect shown in FIG. 19A) Etc.) and a second suggestion display whose display size is the second size (a second title reach title image 31AK062 displayed during the reach title production shown in FIG. 19D) (for example, an image) A display device 5 and an effect control CPU 120),
The display means includes
Plural types of elements having different modes (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry), etc.) shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D) A specific image (including a fruit pattern shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D) configured to include
When displaying either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display in a pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. (The shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D may be displayed so as to include the elements E1 to E5).
According to such a configuration, the specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. Thereby, it is possible to accurately tell that the specific image is displayed.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the variation pattern and the kind of reach. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in a notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of a modification. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a back perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine with the gaming machine frame open. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 150IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 150IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 150IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process performed at the time of power activation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an initial appearance determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start waiting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pre-game suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game suggestion effect determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect determination table during a game. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a puzzle effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a puzzle effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a puzzle production determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a puzzle production | presentation aspect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of big hit effect determination processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit suggestion effect determination table, an accessory effect determination table, and a light-guide plate effect determination table. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production aspect of a puzzle production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production aspect of a puzzle production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production aspect of a puzzle production. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for game machines in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 2. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for game machines in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pachinko game machine in the modification 3.

(Basic explanation)
First, a basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also a configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting device.

  In a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, to the right of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of special symbols (also called special figures) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Examples of the fluctuation include an update display of a plurality of symbols, a scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, and enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols. In the case of a special symbol or a variation of a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes an aspect in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). Note that variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as a “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a “second special figure game”. There may be one kind of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols. The variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down) Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special display game and the variable display of the decorative symbols executed in synchronism are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, there may be provided a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display for which execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of stored memories. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved memory number. The total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

  In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs lit. To display the first reserved memory number, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the second reserved memory number according to the number of lit LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball apparatus 6A forms a first start winning opening that is maintained in a certain open state in which a game ball can always enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number of (for example, three) prize balls are paid out and the first special game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second start winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball apparatus 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is off, the tip of the movable wing piece Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball enters the closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening when the movable blade piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second starting ball). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the one having an electric tulip type accessory as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places in the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning ports 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning entrance. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special prize opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the big prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When game balls enter the big prize opening, for example, more prize balls are paid out than when game balls enter the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, and the general prize opening 10, for example.

  The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning at the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port starting port) is also referred to as starting winning.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and variably displays normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. A normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of normal symbols is also called a general game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the usual game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general figure hold display unit 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of general figure hold storage, which is the number of general figure games that are being executed, by the number of lighted LEDs.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates in accordance with the performance is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 that is operated by a player or the like in order to launch a game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31 </ b> A and the push button 31 </ b> B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's operation (operation, etc.), but other detection means may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a rotation operation by the player to the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In the case where the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the previous execution of the usual game, etc. (when the game ball passes through the pass gate 41 but the usual game based on the pass cannot be executed immediately). The usual game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. When the “normal hit” is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When a game ball enters the first start winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  If a game ball enters (wins) a start winning opening during a period during which a special figure game is being executed or during a period where a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, which will be described later, is controlled (a start winning has occurred) In the case where the special game based on the start prize cannot be immediately executed), the special game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In a special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, “7”, the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, it will be a “hit” symbol. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, “2”) is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. In addition, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “-”) different from the big hit symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it is “lost”.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes an elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds), and a timing until the number of game balls that have entered the winning prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which a big winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. One cycle in which the grand prize opening is in an open state is called a round (round game). In the big hit gaming state, it can be repeatedly executed until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or twice).

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state, and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  Note that a “big hit” is set as the big hit type. For example, a number of types of opening of the big prize opening (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) and gaming state after the big hit gaming state (described later, normal state, short-time state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and depending on them Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type that can obtain many prize balls, or a jackpot type that has few prize balls or hardly obtains prize balls.

  In the small hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening of the big prize opening is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big prize opening is also the same. Etc.), the grand prize opening is opened. Similar to the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, depending on the big hit type, it may be controlled to a short time state or a probable change state.

  In the short-time state, control (short-time control) is executed to shorten the average special figure change time (period during which the special figure is changed) compared to the normal state. In the short-time state, by reducing the average normal map change time (period in which the normal map is changed) from the normal state, or by improving the probability of “per normal map” in the normal game, than the normal state, Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The short-time state is a state advantageous for the player because the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time reduction control, probability variation control is executed in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than in the normal state. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is likely to be a “hit” in addition to the improvement of the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

  The short-time state or the probability change state continues until any one end condition such as that a predetermined number of special game has been executed and the next big hit game state has been established. A game whose end condition is that a predetermined number of special game has been executed is also referred to as a number of cuts (short time cut, number change probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as a big hit gaming state advantageous for the player, a short-time state, a probable change state, etc., and the display result in the ordinary game is “per ordinary figure”. The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game is “big hit” is the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after power-on) This is the same control as when the process was not executed.

  A state in which the probability variation control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not being performed is also referred to as a low probability state. The state where the time reduction control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and the state where the time reduction control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the short-time state is a low-accuracy base state, the probability variation state is a high-accuracy high-base state, the normal state is a low-accuracy-low base state, and so on. The highly accurate state and the low base state are also referred to as a highly accurate low base state.

  After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game is “small hit” is controlled continuously (however, “small hit” occurs) If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times, the gaming state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there is no “small hit” as the display result of the special game.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big prize opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game ball may be controlled to be in a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 This may be performed by turning on / off the light, and the operation of the movable body 32.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special game or the first game is produced as an effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game. Corresponding to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable decorative symbol display ) Is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end thereof, the variable display mode of the decorative design may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for decorative symbols that have not been stopped yet when the decorative symbols stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of a jackpot combination described later. It is a mode that is continuing.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the above-described reach mode during variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special figure game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) according to the production mode becomes “big hit” (also called the big hit reliability or the big hit expectation). Different types of reach production are executed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach with higher hit reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a predetermined decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the symbol is “big hit”). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed together on predetermined active lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of “probable big hit”, which is controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state, odd numbers of decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and after the big hit gaming state is finished, In the case of a “non-probable big hit (normal big hit)” that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”, etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as probability variation symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-probable variation symbols (normal symbols). After reaching the reach mode with a non-probable variable symbol, a promotion effect that finally becomes a “probable big hit” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special game is “small hit”, as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative symbol (for example, “ 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eye are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes “big hit” of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state) and when it becomes “small hit” A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode is not the reach mode, but the non-reach combination fixed display pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach lose”) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be “non-reach lose”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the predetermined reach combination (“reach loss”) that is not a big hit combination is displayed as the variable display display result of the decorative design. In other cases, the fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as “definitely”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is “reach lose”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). As other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during variable display of decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display being executed, and a pre-read notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display for which execution is suspended). As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative design during the variable display of the decorative design and then restarting the variable display, the single variable display is made to appear as a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo-continuous effect may be executed.

  Even during the big hit game state, the big hit effect for informing the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state may be executed. In addition, during the small hit game state, the small hit effect during the small hit game state is executed. In addition, the big hit game in the small hit game state and a part of the big hit type (a big hit type of the big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent gaming state is a high probability state) By executing a common effect with the state, the player may not know whether the current state is the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, a common effect is executed after the end of the small hit gaming state and after the end of the big hit gaming state, so that it is not possible to identify whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. May be.

  Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, and a relay board 15 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are disposed on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-described game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of holding), execution of a general game (including management of holding), jackpot A gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, and the like). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and the like. And a random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as later-described variation patterns, later-described effect control commands, and various tables referred to when making various determinations described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period even when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first hold). And an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display hold device 25B, the second hold display device 25B, the general-purpose hold display device 25C, etc.

  The switch circuit 110 is configured to detect detection signals (game balls pass or not) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch is turned on is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Through the transmission of the detection signal, the passing or entry of the game ball is detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the grand prize opening door. To transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) sends an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. 12 is supplied. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The production control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later) )), A game status (for example, start and end of variable display, open status of a big prize opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, gaming state), a command specifying an error, and the like.

  The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives production control commands, and produces productions (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. (Including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, notification of power failure recovery, etc.).

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). Including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when an operation by the player is detected and indicating the operation content as appropriate). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the audio designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the ramp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the ramp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and lamp on / off.

  The production control CPU 120 executes sound output, lamp on / off control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.) and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 124 counts numerical data indicating various random values (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects in an updatable manner. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

  For example, the I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits an input port for receiving an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, ramp signal). Output port.

  Substrates other than the main board 11 such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14 are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets the interruption prohibited (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting for making the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop process immediately before it becomes unable to operate due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes addition of error detection codes (checksum, parity bits, etc.) and processing for backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags and various timer states) for progressing the game, but also the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, when the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped and the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt processing described later. Will be.

  And CPU103 transmits the production control command which instruct | indicates the recovery | restoration from a power interruption to the production control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, an effect control command for designating a backed-up gaming state before power interruption, or an effect control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. These commands can use the same commands as those set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power recovery from the power interruption has been made or is being recovered from the power interruption. To display the screen. The effect control CPU 120 may perform an appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, the loop processing is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110. Whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Subsequently, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrence of jackpot) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of winnings) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) is output (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of special symbol game execution and suspension, control of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, control of a gaming state, etc. Later).

  Following the special symbol process, a normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process for each timer interruption, thereby managing the execution and holding of the ordinary game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), The opening control of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on “per figure” is enabled. The ordinary game is executed by driving the normal symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure display number is displayed by turning on the ordinary symbol display device 25C.

  After executing the normal symbol process, a process when a power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, or the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting occurrence of a start winning, storing hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold memory number is executed. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a variation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process for determining in advance a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the hold information and the number of reserved memories, transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating determination results such as the occurrence of a start prize, the number of reserved memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of a start winning set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S <b> 110 to S <b> 120) of the special symbol process, transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is determined based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when “big hit” is assumed Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a confirmed special symbol (any one of the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1”, and the special symbol normal process ends. The special game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in order of winning (also referred to as winning order digestion).

  When various determinations are made based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which determination values to be compared with random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, one of multiple types of variation patterns can be selected using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of prior determination of whether the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. The process to decide on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  Fluctuation patterns include special game execution time (special graphic variable time) (also the execution time of decorative symbol variable display), decorative symbol variable display mode (such as presence / absence of reach), and variable decorative symbol display The content of the production (the type of reach production, etc.) is designated and is also called a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. This includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. When the time elapsed since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol variation process is terminated.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and stops (displays) the definite special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. The process to set for is included. When the display result is “big hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the display result is “lost”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is “small hit” or “losing”, the gaming state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability variation state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for jackpots includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state and setting the open winning opening based on the fact that the display result is “hit” It is. When the big prize opening is in an open state, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period in which the big winning opening is opened or an upper limit execution number of rounds is set corresponding to which of the big hit types. When these settings are finished, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and the big hit release pre-processing is finished.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". The big hit opening process includes a process for measuring an elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, a number of game balls detected by the measured elapsed time and the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the prize winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the prize winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the jackpot release is terminated.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit-opening process, a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big winning opening is opened has reached the set upper limit execution number, and when the upper limit execution number is reached, the big hit game state The process etc. which perform the setting for ending are included. When the round execution count does not reach the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, whereas when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution count, the special figure process flag value is updated. The value is updated to “7”. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the processing after the big hit release ends.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. This includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the jackpot end processing ends.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the big winning opening in the small hit gaming state based on the fact that the display result is “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When the big prize opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit gaming state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening process ends.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. This small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and displays the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for performing a predetermined operation check is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and awaits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command can be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S75, an effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED, and the movable body 32 Control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to an effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11 are performed on the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices.

  Following the effect control process in step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Another process may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the hold memory number specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the CPU 120 for effect control selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative design in the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative design (determined decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various The presence / absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, execution start timing, and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. Thereafter, based on the set production control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”, and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. In addition, driving the movable body 32, outputting sound and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and issuing a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols, such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output, is executed. After such effect control is performed, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or a command specifying stop display of the final decorative symbols is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to what has been done, the definite decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the definite decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command for designating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state has been received from the main board 11. When an effect control command designating starting a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state is received, if the command designates the start of a big hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is set to “6”. Update to "". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hit. Also, when the command waiting time of the command has passed without receiving a command specifying that the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is started, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “losing”. Thus, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process per special figure is terminated.

  The small hitting effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the setting contents. . Also, in the small hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command to end the small hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit effect production process is terminated.

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set content. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the small hit end effect process is ended.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the jackpot game state, and executes various effect controls in the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command for ending the big hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing. 7 ", and the big hit effect processing is terminated.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and performs various effects control of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. Run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but encloses the game media and gives points based on the occurrence of winnings. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating “−”) is displayed during variable display of the special symbol, and variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, in the case where the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbols are stopped in response to the stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium with respect to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1; It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by installing it in a storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, the comparison expression (expression such as “high”, “low”, “difference”, etc.) of various ratios such as the performance execution ratio is that the ratio of one is “0%”. May be included. For example, one of the ratios is “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Explanation regarding the feature 31AK)
Next, the characteristic part 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern and the type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8A, in this embodiment, the non-reach losing fluctuation patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 in which the decorative display variable display mode is not the reach mode and the display result is “lost”. , The variation pattern PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., in which the decorative pattern variable display mode is the reach mode and the display result is “lost”, and the display result is “big hit” Fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like are prepared.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 8B, in this embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect suggesting that the reach effect is controlled. As shown by the number of black stars in FIG. 8B, the reliability when each reach is executed (the jackpot reliability) is as follows: normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach B <Higher in the order of Super Reach A. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it becomes a big hit.

  In this embodiment, super reach is executed via normal reach. Further, during the reach production of the super reach, the development production that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. Variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like, such as variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 shown in FIG. 8A, are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. In FIG. 8A, a variation pattern in which the reliability is developed to a superreach level one level is shown, but a variation pattern in which the reliability is developed in two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, except for the normal reach with the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8B, the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, the super reach E having the lowest reliability in the super reach is notified of the reach title only by display, and the title of the other super reach is notified by display and voice. In this way, the notification of the title is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than the reach with low reliability. Thereby, a player's expectation can be effectively spoken, and the production effect is improved. Note that the notification mode of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Further, the fonts of the title characters (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and typefaces (lines, fonts, etc.) may be varied depending on the type of reach.

  The notification of the reach title (title notification) is not limited to indicating the title itself, such as the name of the reach, but may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the effect content of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of production operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following effect operation is executed by the effect control CPU 120 executing effect control process processing based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 are diagrams showing an example of super reach production operation in the present embodiment. FIG. 9A shows that variable display of decorative symbols is being executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. . After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 9B, the decorative symbols indicating the numbers 7 on the “left” and “right” stop and become a reach mode. After that, the production branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of super reach A, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001, which is a teammate character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of super reach production, such as when the introduction of super reach production (also referred to as super reach production) ends, the entire screen of image display device 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. The super reach A title 31AK002 (here “SP reach A” characters) is displayed, and the speaker 8 outputs the sound corresponding to the reach title name (here “super reach A”). The title of Super Reach A is notified. Thereafter, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 9E, the character 31AK003, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 are confronted. The subsequent part of the reach production of Super Reach A is executed. An effect in which characters confront each other is also called a battle effect. In the battle effect, if a teammate character wins, the game is a big hit, and if a teammate character loses, the game is lost.

  In addition, when displaying a line on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, a sound corresponding to the line may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the lines are not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 9E, and may be displayed as subtitles on the lower part of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the start of the super reach effect, such as when the introduction of the super reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 9 (F), the title 31AK005 (here) Is displayed, and the audio corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, “super reach B”) is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of the super reach B. The Thereafter, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 9G, the character 31AK006, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 are confronted. The subsequent part of the reach production of Super Reach B is executed.

  As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach title is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the super reach production. By doing in this way, since the title can be notified after showing the introduction portion of the super reach effect to the player, etc., the effect effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  Also, in Super Reach A (FIG. 9 (C) → (D) → (E)...) And Super Reach B (FIG. 9 (C) → (F) → (G). In the introductory part until the notification is made, a super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 9C). By doing in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super reach is made after the super reach production is started and which title is notified. The super-reach A and the super-reach B are not limited to making the production mode until the title is notified completely common, and it is possible to determine which super-reach is to be determined if the production is closely watched. You may make it make a part into a common production | presentation aspect. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect that displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to a title to be notified thereafter. It may be. By doing in this way, the production effect is improved and the player pays attention to the production. As described above, the title notification may be executed after it is possible to specify which super reach is to be made.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 9H, the Super Reach D title 31AK007 (here, the letters “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, “defeat the enemy”) is output from the speaker 8, thereby informing the title of the super reach D. Thus, in the super reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach production. Further, below the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion display 31AK008 indicating the expectation degree of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. Here, the expectation degree is an expectation degree that is a big hit, but does not have to be completely coincident with the reach big hit reliability.

  Note that the super-reach D audio notification does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the contents of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the voice title notification is varied depending on the type of reach. Thereby, the notification mode of a title alert | report becomes various and an interest improves.

  After the title is notified in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation level suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right part of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing in this way, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of reach even during reach production. In FIG. 9I, the contents of the effects common to those in FIG. 9C (super reach A and super reach B) are shown, but a super reach effect dedicated to super reach D may be executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 9J, the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of Super Reach D where the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 are confronted is executed. The

(Super Reach E)
In the case of super reach E, as shown in FIG. 10A, the title 31AK010 of super reach E (here, the letters “SP reach E”) is displayed in a part on the upper left of the image display device 5. Thus, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the enemy character 31AK011 are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of Super Reach E where the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is displayed. Executed. Thus, in the super reach E, the title is notified together with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during reach production.

  In the reach production of Super Reach E with a low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent giving a player an excessive sense of expectation by performing the title notification without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach production of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped and the title notification is performed (FIGS. 9D, 9F, 9D). H)). By doing in this way, the title notification according to the super reach production can be executed and the production effect is improved. Note that the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach in super reach production such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D. Contrary to this embodiment, in the reach production of the super reach with high hit reliability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach production of the super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped and the title notification may be performed.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the super reach production, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the super reach production is performed. The title is announced at the start. By doing in this way, the title alert | report according to reach production can be performed and production effect improves. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B with high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach with low jackpot reliability. In E, the title is notified at the start of the super reach production, but the title is notified at the start of the super reach production when the reach is high and the super reach when the reach is low. The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
In this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the image display device 5 is notified. The title is notified in a part of the screen (second area). By doing in this way, the title alert | report according to reach production can be performed and production effect improves. In particular, in the case of a reach with high hit reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits the entire screen, or the title is displayed there with the entire background as the background for title notification. Things (title announcement using the entire screen) or the like may be used. In addition, the display area where the title notification is performed may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, and the display area where the title notification is performed may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect may be arbitrarily changed. For example, in the case of a reach with a high hit reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of a reach with a low reliability. Further, in the case where the display area for performing the title notification is varied according to the reach effect, the display area may be varied as in this embodiment, or the display location may be varied.

(Expectation indication)
In this embodiment, in the supervision A and superreach B title notifications with high jackpot reliability, the superleach D having a lower jackpot reliability than superreach A and superreach B without displaying an expectation indication. In the title notification, the expectation suggestion display is displayed. By doing in this way, it can prevent that an effect becomes dull. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower hit reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation suggestion display is not displayed. By doing in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from losing a sense of expectation by displaying an expectation indication indicating that the reliability is low in a reach with low reliability. Note that an expectation indication may be displayed in at least a part of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach E.

  Note that the expected level suggestion display is not limited to that indicated by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 9 (H), etc., and the expected level may be suggested by a meter or a gauge. The numerical values may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9H or the like, in the case of indicating by the number of black stars, the number of stages of expectation may be increased so that half black (half) black stars can be displayed.

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is deleted and a super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in super reach A and super reach B, attention can be paid to reach production. In Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until a decision effect described later is executed. Thereby, in the super reach D and the super reach E, the kind of reach can be grasped even during the super reach production. In addition, by performing the above, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the reach effect and improve the effect. Note that the display end timing of the title can be changed arbitrarily since any effect can be achieved.

  In addition, although the production operation of the reach effect of Super Reach C is omitted here, for example, title notification or expectation suggestion display corresponding to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decisive production)
After each reach effect is executed, when it is time to derive the display result (the final stage of variable display), a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a “big hit” is executed. The decision effect includes a decision effect indicating that the display result is “big hit” and a decision effect indicating that the display result is “lost”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, a decision effect is displayed in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5. Thereafter, if the display result is “big hit”, an image 31AK013 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 10C, and a big hit combination is obtained as shown in FIG. 10D. A definitive decorative symbol is derived. If the display result is “losing”, an image indicating that the teammate character has been defeated is displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination is derived.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified even during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the determined effect is executed. As a result, attention can be paid to the determined effect, and a well-defined title notification can be executed.

  In the example of the production operation shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, during the reach production of the super reach, the decorative design is reduced and executed in the lower right part of the image display device 5. The method of displaying the decorative pattern may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative pattern may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shading, number, etc.) may be varied depending on the type of reach effect.

  In addition, when displaying on-screen display, active display, character resident display during variable display, and mobile-related display, the image display device 5 is appropriately hidden during the super-reach reach effect in order to focus on the reach effect. It is good. At this time, during the low-reliability reach production such as Super Reach E, these displays may be kept displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting excessively due to the low-reliability reach effect, and it is possible to focus attention on the reach effect in the high-reliability reach effect.

(Development production)
Next, an example of an effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 11A, when the development effect is executed when the reach effect of Super Reach D is being executed (the title notification of Super Reach D is being executed), FIG. As shown in the figure, an effect that the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn is executed. Thereafter, in the case of developing to super reach A, as shown in FIG. 11C, the title of super reach A is notified and the reach effect of super reach A is executed. In the case of developing to super reach B, as shown in FIG. 11D, the title of super reach B is notified, and the reach effect of super reach is executed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source reach is switched to the title notification of the development destination reach, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 11, when the development reach is a reach that performs title notification by display and sound, title notification by display and sound is executed again.

  The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 11B, and may be an effect that the screen gradually cracks and breaks, or displays a sandstorm (display that appears to be broken). You may do it. By making such an effect, an unexpected effect can be executed. Note that there may be a development effect such as an effect that the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion)
In the effect operation example shown in FIG. 9 (H), a black star indicating the degree of expectation is displayed from the beginning in the degree-of-expectation suggestion display 31AK008. An expectation suggestion effect that suggests an expectation by becoming a black star may be executed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 12 (A), when the title of Super Reach D is notified, first, five white star expectation indications 31AK021 are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 12B, a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expected degree suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12C, the black star 31AK022 moves and the expected degree suggestion display 31AK021 A performance that fits into one of the white stars is performed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound “pin” indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12D and 12E, the same effects are repeated the number of times corresponding to the degree of reach expectation. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise every time it is repeated (every number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation is accommodated in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021, the black star is highlighted as shown in FIG. 12F. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion effect has ended.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F, black stars are displayed one by one, and the expectation level indicated by the expectation level suggestion display is increased by one level. However, there are two or more black stars. It may be displayed so that the degree of expectation increases by two or more levels. Alternatively, half of the black stars may be displayed and the expectation level may be increased by half. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output according to the number of stars to be displayed (the number of steps of the expected degree of increase). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing in this way, expectation suggestion production becomes various and production effect improves. Note that the same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of stages of expectation that increase at a time, fits into the white stars in the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of stages of expected increase Such an effect may be executed.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even when the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, character, motif, sound output from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays and the game state, or may be changeable by the player's operation.

  FIGS. 12G to 12L are examples of the presentation operation of the title notification and the degree of expectation presentation when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the presentation mode. In the normal mode, as shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F, a title notification and an expectation suggestion effect are executed. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the variation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2, which is different from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the variation pattern of super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. At this time, audio corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but audio different from the normal mode (for example, audio having a different voice color) is output. In addition, the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star but a diamond.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 12 (H), a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation level suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12 (I), the black rhombus 31AK025 moves and the expectation level suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed. An effect that fits in one of the white diamonds is performed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound “pong” indicating that the black diamond indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12J and 12K, the same effects are repeated the number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation is accommodated in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, as shown in FIG. 12 (L), the black rhombus is highlighted. In this way, depending on the presentation mode (the state when the reach presentation is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the gaming state, etc., the presentation can be varied and the presentation effect can be varied by changing the notification mode of the title. improves.

  In FIG. 12, although the example of the production | presentation operation | movement when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is designated is shown, other reach productions (title notification, expectation suggestion production) by production mode (state when reach production is performed). (Including) may be different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not the reach title is notified or the execution rate of the title notification may be varied. For example, when a predetermined production mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing in this way, the production according to the player's preference can be executed and the production effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation degree suggestion display, and the expectation suggestion effect that increases the number of black stars stepwise is executed. An expectation suggestion effect that reduces the number of displays suggesting stepwise may be executed. Such an expectation suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other examples of development effects)
In the case of performing the expectation suggestion effect that increases the display indicating the expectation level of the expectation level suggestion step by step, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation level. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at a time instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 13A, after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of increasing the number of black stars stepwise is completed, the button is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. The development effect in which the image 31AK031 is displayed is executed. Here, when an operation on the push button 31B is detected, the super reach C title 31AK032 (here, the letters “SP reach C”) is displayed as shown in FIG. The title of reach C is notified. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source reach is switched to the title notification of the development destination reach, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, below the title 31AK032, an expectation suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by 2 or more, it is displayed at once. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title or the degree of expectation indication changes may be executed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the reliability of a big hit is executed according to a notification mode of a title (for example, a display color of a title). For example, as shown in FIG. 14A, the Super Reach A title 31AK036 is displayed in black, and the audio corresponding to the Reach title name is output from the speaker 8 to notify the Super Reach A title. Then, as shown in FIG. 14 (B), a title notice in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed. Thus, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title preview shown in FIG. 14, the title display mode (display color) may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing in this way, the effect of a notice effect can be enhanced. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of the title display.

  In addition, when a title notice that changes the display mode (display color) of the title is executed, after the display mode of the title is changed, sound corresponding to the changed display mode may be output. By doing in this way, the effect of a notice effect can be enhanced. Moreover, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, sound corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change may be output.

(Title notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title being reached is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) that improves the degree of expectation controlled to the big hit advantageous state, such as the notice effect or the development effect. In this way, once the title is notified, an effect that improves the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a notice effect determination process for determining whether or not a notice effect is executed and an effect aspect. The notice effect determining process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process in step S171 of FIG. In the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a variation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001).

  If the change pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 31 AKS 001; Yes), the display color of the super reach title (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31 AKS 002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the super reach title is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “lost”. As shown in FIG. 16A, the display color of the Super Reach title changes from “black”, “red”, “black” to “red”, and from “black” to “fruit pattern”. The thing which changes from "red" to "fruit pattern" is provided, and the big hit reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the title. By doing in this way, a player comes to pay attention to the change timing of the display color of a title, and a production effect improves.

  Note that the “fruit pattern” may be such that the title text is displayed in bold and the text itself is “fruit pattern”, or the background portion of the title display area is “fruit pattern”. . There may be a pattern displayed as “fruit pattern” from the beginning. As for the display color changing, as shown in FIG. 14, the display color may be changed after the title notification is executed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be varied according to the timing at which the display color changes. In addition, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may vary depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach with a long title display period (for example, super reach D or super reach E), a plurality of changing timings may be provided to determine any of the changing timings. In the case of a super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of timings to be changed may be one or less than that of a super reach with a long title display period.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the production mode, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A in the normal mode, and the normal mode as shown in FIG. Determine the display color of the title at a different rate. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by changing the execution mode of the title notice (display color and display color change timing) depending on the effect mode, the effects become more diverse and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, a serif notice that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed as the notice effect according to the display mode (for example, the display color of the words) of the characters in the reach effect of the super reach.

  After determining the display color of the super-reach title, the display color of the character's speech in the super-reach reach effect (whether or not to execute the speech advance notice) is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the lines in the reach effect is determined at a determination ratio shown in FIG. 16C, for example, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “lost”. As shown in FIG. 16C, the display colors of the lines in the reach production are “white”, “red”, and those that change from “white” to “red”, and are in this order (ascending order). The jackpot reliability is high. That is, the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the lines. By doing in this way, a player comes to pay attention to the change timing of the display color of words, and the production effect improves. For the display color changing, the display color may be changed after the line is displayed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be varied according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the presentation modes of the title notice and the line notice. For example, when the same notice mode (display color) is included in the title notice and the line notice, the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same notice form is obtained. Also, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the change timing of the production mode of the title notice and the line notice. For example, the big hit reliability may be higher when the change timing is the same than when the change timing is different, or the big hit reliability may be different depending on which change is first. In this way, it is possible to focus attention on the change timings of the title notice and the line notice.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the lines may be determined in a ratio different from the normal mode in the special mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

  In addition, it may replace with serif notice and may be made to perform the notice effect which notifies a big hit reliability by the change of the effect aspect of reach production. In that case, in the notice effect, a plurality of effect mode change timings may be provided so that the jackpot reliability differs according to the change timing.

  After determining the display color of the line in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the change pattern is not a super reach variation pattern (step AK31S001; No), the presence / absence of execution and the effect mode are determined for other notice effects (step AK31S004). Thereafter, the determination result in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the notice effect determination process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, the title notice and the serif notice can be executed in the case of super reach. However, in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the super-reliable super reach), the title notice is provided. And at least one of the serif notices may be made executable. Further, although the title notice and the line notice have been described as being determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16, the determination ratio is arbitrary, and for example, the determination ratio may be varied depending on the type of super reach. By doing in this way, the notice effect according to the kind of reach can be performed, and the production effect improves.

  In this embodiment, the number of performance modes that can be executed (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the line notice. By doing in this way, the production becomes various and the production effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the serif notice, the number of executable effect modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable effect modes may be the same. By doing in this way, a unified notice effect can be executed, and the player can easily grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action effect)
An effect indicating that the effect mode changes may be executed when the effect mode of the title notice and the line notice change. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5 and an action effect in which the image acts on at least one of a title and a line may be executed. And after an effect production | presentation is performed, you may make it a production | presentation aspect (display color) of a title or a line change. The effect mode (action effect image or the like) of the action effect may be the same regardless of whether it acts on the title or the speech. There may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the line does not change even though the effect effect is executed. When the action effect is executed, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination results relating to the title notice and the line notice. Such a determination may be executed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, according to the effect mode of the action effect, the rate at which at least one effect mode of the title notice and the serif notice changes (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different. The rate of change in which direction of appearance changes (the rate of which acts) may be different, and the rate of change in what color (how many steps) may be changed. . By executing such an action effect, the player will pay attention to which of the title and the line will act when the action effect image is displayed, and the effect is improved. In addition, when there exist several production | presentation modes, you may make it determine the presence or absence of execution of an effect production, and the production | presentation aspect at a different ratio according to production | presentation mode. By doing in this way, the effect production according to production mode can be performed and production effect improves.

  As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of either a title or a line depending on the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May be changed. By doing in this way, the player comes to pay attention to the contents of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above-described characteristic portion 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all the characteristic portions described in the above embodiment are not essential components and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the gaming machine frame 3. Here, although expressed as a sub liquid crystal, the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a display of a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. As in the case of the super reach D and the super reach E in the above embodiment, when the title is continuously displayed even after the notification of the title, the title and the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after the title is notified on the image display device 5, the title or the degree of expectation indication may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. By doing in this way, a title and an expectation suggestion display which can display a title and an expectation suggestion display without obstructing the super reach production in the image display device 5 are also easy to understand.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestion effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification (notification that mainly displays characters) related to other effects. May be. For example, in the case where a pre-read zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) having different background images and effect modes in the image display device 5 is executed as the notice effect (for example, the pre-read notice effect), the transitioned zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification. When presenting a mission (such as “Reach with 7”, “Defeat all enemies using a stick controller”) and executing a mission effect that will be advantageous to the player when the mission is achieved, The present invention may be applied to mission title notification.

(Modification 1 of the characteristic part 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a decision effect for informing whether or not the display result is “big hit” is executed, and then the display result is shown ( FIG. 10 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a determined effect, when the predetermined timing before the display result is derived, an operation effect that prompts the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and a predetermined operation is detected during the operation effective period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the victory or defeat of the battle effect or temporarily stopping the display result. By doing in this way, since a display result is shown according to a player's operation, a player's willingness to participate in a game can be raised and interest is improved.

  FIGS. 17 and 18 are diagrams illustrating an example of super reach effect operation in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 17 (A), after reaching the reach mode in the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. Then, as shown in FIGS. 17C to 17F and FIGS. 18G to 18I, a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

  With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 17C, a small button image 31AK043 and a restriction line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed on the lower right of the image display device 5. Thereby, although the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that an operation effect is executed are prepared. The big hit reliability varies depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, an image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable aspect.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 17D, a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 17E, the praying character 31AK045 is changed to a happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 is changed to the large button image 31AK047. To change.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 18 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which the bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the bullet hits the large button image 31AK047. The effect 31AK050 to be displayed is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to a stick image 31AK051.

  Thus, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, an effect effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. Note that the operation effect image may change without an action effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the action effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may vary depending on the type of action effect.

  Thereafter, before a predetermined time before the display result is derived, the restriction line 31AK044 is deleted as shown in FIG. 18 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is enlarged and displayed in the center as shown in FIG. 18 (K). A display prompting the user to pull the stick controller 31A is displayed. Further, at this time, an operation effective period in which the operation to the stick controller 31A is effective.

  When an operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. Thereafter, at the timing when the variation time ends, as shown in FIG. If no operation is detected within a predetermined operation effective period, the image shown in FIG. 18 (L) is automatically displayed.

  In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as the operation effect image, and when the operation effect using these images is executed in the order of the small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability is high. Even if an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, it may change to an operation effect image with high reliability during reach production, so the production effect is improved and the player's expectation is also improved. Can be maintained.

  In the example of the effect operation shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the reach title notification and the expectation suggestion display are omitted, but in parallel with the reach effect and the operation effect shown in FIGS. It may be executed. The determination relating to the operation effect or the operation effect image (the presence / absence of the operation effect, the operation effect image to be displayed, the presence / absence of the action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG.

(Modification 2 of the characteristic part 31AK)
You may make it perform the suggestion display which suggests the expectation degree of control to advantageous states, such as a big hit game state. For example, the shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with the shutter display after the variable display is started is executed. In the reach title effect, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect after the reach is executed. There are cases where a specific image is included and displayed when any one of the shutter display and the reach title display is displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title notice in the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image having a high jackpot reliability displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The multiple types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. A fruit pattern image including these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. The display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the display size difference between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display.

  When a shutter effect is executed after the start of variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the execution of the reach effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image not including the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Note that an image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image indicating the big hit reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of the big hit reliability (for example, a red shutter or a red letter reach title). Then, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

  When a fruit pattern is displayed during shutter display and reach title display, a notification of outputting a common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 and a notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 are performed. By the light emission control of the common sound and game effect lamp 9, the player is shown that the fruit pattern is a special image. When such shutter display and reach title display are performed, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. Note that the output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 19 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of variable display. In the shutter image 31AK061, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, when the shutter effect is executed, notification that outputs a common sound (melody) from the speaker 8 is executed, and notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, the decorative symbol variable display is started as shown in FIG. A downward arrow indicates variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 19D, a super reach production is started. For example, the variable display is displayed in a small size on the upper right side of the screen and a character is displayed on the left side of the screen. A reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the contents of the super reach to be executed from now on are shown as a reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, in the reach title image 31AK062, characters “battle reach” indicating that a reach effect accompanied by a battle effect is executed are displayed.

  In addition, when the reach title effect is executed, notification that outputs a common sound (melody) from the speaker 8 is executed and notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect is performed in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) indicating that the big hit reliability is high, such as “Atsuiatsui”. Here, the size of the suggestion display displayed in the reach title effect is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting a specific sound, it can be made easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image has been displayed. In addition, although the case where the output period of the common sound and the specific sound is completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

  Thereafter, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. An enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the teammate character wins the battle with the enemy character, the characters “Battle Victory!” Are displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is informed that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect ends, the display returns to the variable display screen with the original number design. As shown in FIG. 19 (f), all symbols are stopped and a big hit symbol of “777” is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. Thereby, it is possible to accurately tell that a fruit pattern image having a high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  Also, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noted.

  Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D are displayed at different timings. If it does in this way, it can prevent that the fruit pattern image which is a specific image becomes difficult to see by the execution timing overlapping.

  The determination related to the shutter effect (whether the shutter effect is present or the effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. In that case, the determination related to the shutter effect may be made based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, a fruit pattern shutter effect may be easily performed. Further, the determination related to the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 15 together with the determination related to the shutter effect.

(Explanation regarding feature 150IW)
Next, the feature unit 150IW will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 20-1 and FIG. 20-2, a pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 150IW001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a game board constituting a game board surface. (Gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 150IW003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting device. Further, the gaming machine frame 150IW003 includes a glass door frame 150IW003a having a glass window between a door open position where the front surface of the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened around the left side and a door closed position where the front surface is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 150IW003a so that the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 150IW003a is closed.

  Further, the gaming machine frame 150IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a shop clerk of the game hall into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and players other than the shop clerk can use the gaming machine frame 150IW003 and glass. The door frame 150IW003a cannot be opened.

  The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case 150IW201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 150IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state to be described later.

  The setting switching main body provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the setting key 150IW051, is housed in the board case 150IW201 together with the main board 11, and the setting key 150IW051 does not have to open the board case 150IW201. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the right side of the back surface of the substrate case 150IW201 so that the operation can be performed.

  Since the board case 150IW201 having the setting key 150IW051 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. Operation is possible by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using the door key. Further, since the setting key 150IW051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the store clerk or the like of the game hall, only the store clerk possessing the setting key can be operated. The setting key 150IW051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later. In the feature 150IW, the door key and the setting key are illustrated as separate keys. However, a single key may be used.

  The substrate case 150IW201 is provided with a display monitor 150IW029 and a display changeover switch 150IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 150IW029. The display monitor 150IW029 and the display changeover switch 150IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged at the upper left part of the board case 150IW201. That is, the display monitor 150IW029 and the display changeover switch 150IW030 are arranged on the front surface when the main substrate 11 is visually recognized in the substrate case 150IW201. Since the main board 11 is not visible when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is not opened, the front side when the main board 11 is viewed is the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 150IW003 opened. It is the front when visually recognizing and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made common.

  As described above, the setting key 150IW051 in this feature 150IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the gaming machine frame 3 closed, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 There is a possibility that the setting key 150IW051 may be operated from the inside of the game island to be installed. Therefore, in this feature 150IW, as shown in FIGS. 20-2 and 20-3, the right end of the outer frame 150IW001a is located on the right side of the board case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. Is attached from the back side. The security cover 150IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 150IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 150IW500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 150IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The plate-shaped synthetic resin material has permeability. The vertical dimension of the short piece 150IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 150IW201. Security cover 150IW500A is fixed to the right end of outer frame 150IW001a via the front end of short piece 150IW500Aa.

  As shown in FIG. 20-2, the long piece 150IW500Ab contacts (or closes) from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the right part of the board case 150IW201 in a state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. Accordingly, the right side portion of the substrate case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For this reason, the setting key 150IW051 cannot be operated by the long piece 150IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-3, in the state in which the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the setting key 150IW051 moves together with the gaming machine frame 150IW003 and moves away from the long piece 150IW500Ab. When the covering state by 150IW500Ab is released, the state becomes operable.

  That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature 150IW is maintained in a restricted state in which the operation to the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is restricted by the security cover 150IW500A when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. On the other hand, in the state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the restriction state by the security cover 150IW500A described above is released, and the operation state of the setting key 150IW051 is allowed.

  Since the board case 150IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 150IW051 when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. The setting value cannot be changed by operating the setting key 150IW051 unless the game machine frame 150IW003 is opened by the door key.

  However, in the state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on the gaming island (not shown) of the game hall, even if the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, for example, with other pachinko gaming machines adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1, A fraudulent member such as a wire or a cell board is entered from between a gaming device such as a card unit or a spacer member and the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a setting key 150IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 Since there is a possibility that an illegal act such as changing the setting value by operating is performed, the operation to the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is restricted by the security cover 150IW500A in a state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. By maintaining the regulated state, it is possible to suitably suppress the cheating.

  Even in a restricted state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed and the right side of the back surface of the substrate case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 is covered by the security cover 150IW500A, it is accommodated in the substrate case 150IW201 through the security cover 150IW500A having transparency. Since the main board 11 and the like can be seen through, it is possible to easily check the state of the mounting surface on the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted and the seal seal.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area, thereby executing various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

  In this feature 150IW, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and for determining the normal display result The numerical data indicating the random value MR4 and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of the MR4 are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating by software using a different random counter in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-4 and 20-5, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also has table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A variation pattern table for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (setting value 1) shown in FIG. 20-4 (A), a display result determination table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 20-4 (B), and FIG. -4 (C) display result determination table (setting value 3), big hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), small hit variation pattern determination table (not shown) in FIG. 20-5 (A) 20), a loss variation pattern determination table, a general diagram display result determination table (not illustrated), a general diagram variation pattern determination table (not illustrated), and the like shown in FIG.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 150IW is configured such that the winning probability (outtake rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process, the winning probability (outtake rate) of the jackpot is changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. . The set value consists of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 being the lowest payout rate, and the higher the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3, the higher the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in order of 2, 3, the advantage increases stepwise. In this feature 150IW, the winning probability for the small hit is the same regardless of the set value.

(Display result judgment table)
20A to 20C are explanatory diagrams illustrating display result determination tables corresponding to the set values. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variation special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to fluctuation display, and the variation special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for big hit and a determination value for small hit are set.

  As shown in FIG. 20-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the variable display target. If the set value is “2” or “3”, the winning combination is won with a lower probability (1/320 at non-probable change, 1/32 at probable change). On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hits, and the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are “2” and “3”. It is supposed to be. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the subject of variable display, the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/320 at non-probable change, 1/32 at non-probable change) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display To do. On the other hand, half of these determination values are set as the determination values corresponding to the small hits, so that the first special symbol is small with a higher probability (1/2) than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display. Winning is won.

  As shown in FIG. 20-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 is used and the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. Win a big hit with a higher probability (1/300 for non-probable change, 1/30 for probable change) than in some cases. On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are “1” and “3”. It is supposed to be. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the subject of variable display, the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/300 at non-probable change, 1/30 at probable change) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display To do. On the other hand, since half of these determination values are set as the determination values corresponding to the small hits, there is a higher probability than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value Is won with the same probability (1/2) as when “1” and “3”.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 20-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, Winning a big hit with a higher probability (1/280 at non-probable change, 1/28 at probable change) than in the case of “2”. On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hits, and the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are “1” and “2”. It is supposed to be. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the target of variable display, the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/280 at non-probable change, 1/28 at probable change) as when the first special symbol is the target of variable display To do. On the other hand, since half of these determination values are set as the determination values corresponding to the small hits, there is a higher probability than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value Is won with the same probability (1/2) as when “1” and “2”.

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the MR1 value corresponds to any one of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 20-4 (A) to (C). When the winning judgment value is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). Further, when MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 20-4 (A) to (C), it is determined that the special symbol is to be the small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with a probability according to the set value. Note that “probabilities” shown in FIGS. 20-4 (A) to (C) indicate the probability (proportion) of being a big hit and the probability (proportion) of being a small hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state. However, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to the small hit gaming state, but stop in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  Note that, in this example, as shown in FIG. 20-4, a case where the winning probability per small hit is the same regardless of the set value, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, as in the case of the jackpot winning probability, the winning probability may be increased as the set value increases in the order of 1, 2, and 3. Further, in this case, the setting difference in the winning probability for the small hit may be the same ratio as the setting difference in the winning probability for the big hit. Specifically, if the winning probability per hit at the set value “1” is 1/100, the winning probability per hit at the set value “2” is designed to be 1 / 93.75, You may set so that the winning probability per small hit at setting value “3” may be 1 / 87.5.

  Further, in a gaming machine that does not provide a small hit, the configuration shown by the feature unit 150IW may be applied.

  In this feature 150IW, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit using the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 20-4 (A) to (C). The big hit determination table and the small hit determination table are provided separately, and the big hit determination is performed depending on whether the first special symbol is a variable display or the second special symbol is a variable display regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. A common table may be used, and the small hit determination may be performed using separate tables for the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the first and the second.

  Further, in this feature 150IW, the case where the advantage increases in the order of the setting value “1” <the setting value “2” <the setting value “3” is shown. May be configured to change. For example, it is applied to a gaming machine that is configured to be controlled to a high probability / high base state, to maintain a high probability / high base state until the next big hit, and to obtain a certain amount of prize balls in a small hit game. In this case, in this example, as shown in FIG. 20-4, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, a period in which a small hit occurs with a high probability of 1/2 and a winning ball can be easily obtained. Therefore, unlike the other gaming states, in the specific gaming state (in this example, high probability / high base state), conversely, a big hit is unlikely to occur (high probability / high base state is likely to continue). The value “1” may be set to the highest advantage.

  In addition, for example, when applied to a gaming machine in which the probability variation state ends based on the execution of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times (the probability variation end count) after being controlled to the probability variation state (high probability state), the same probability variation If it is the number of times of completion, the probability variation continuation rate (recession rate) may increase in the order of setting value “1” <setting value “2” <setting value “3”.

  In this feature 150IW, three set values of 1 to 3 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 20-5 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this feature 150IW, when using the stored memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed), determining the jackpot type, A common jackpot type determination table is used for determining the jackpot type using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). Although it is comprised so that it may be used, a different table may be provided and the ratio of which jackpot type is determined may be different.

  In the jackpot type determination table, the jackpot type is selected from the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table that is referred to to determine either.

  In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), a determination value corresponding to the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type is assigned for each set value. The ratio of the determined judgment value is shown. In other words, the ratio of which of the big hit type A to the big hit type C is determined for each set value is shown. Note that a determination value corresponding to a random number is actually assigned to a loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 and a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. In order to simplify the above, the ratio of the assigned judgment value is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the set value is “1”, the ratio determined to the jackpot type C is high and the set value is “2”. When the ratio determined for the jackpot type B is high and the set value is “3”, the determination value is assigned so that the ratio determined for the jackpot type A is high.

  Here, the jackpot type in the feature section 150IW will be described with reference to FIG. 20-5 (B). In the feature section 150IW, a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending period in the jackpot game are determined for each jackpot type. It has been.

  The fanfare period is, for example, a period in which the big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 12 side, the start of the big hit gaming state is started. This is a period in which a fanfare effect is performed as an effect operation to be notified.

  The interval period is, for example, a period in which the big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the round in which the big winning opening is opened on the production control board 12 side, This is a period in which an interval effect as an effect operation for informing the start of the round is executed.

  The ending period is, for example, a period in which the jackpot end process in step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and an ending effect as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed on the effect control board 12 side. It is a period.

  As shown in FIG. 20-5 (B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the case of the jackpot type A, then the longest in the case of the jackpot type B, and the longest in the case of the jackpot type C. It is set to be shorter.

  As described above, in the feature unit 150IW, when the set value is “1”, since the ratio determined as the big hit type C is high, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, since the ratio determined as the big hit type A is high, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively long. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  This feature 150IW is configured such that the winning value (the payout rate) of the jackpot increases in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”, but at the same time, the set value is “1”. The average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period is increased in the order of “<2” <“3”. With such a configuration, when the winning probability of winning the jackpot (race rate) is high, the average duration of the fanfare period, interval period and ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and gambling Can be prevented from becoming too high.

  The feature section 150IW is configured to be able to execute a jackpot suggestion effect (details will be described later) that suggest a set value during the jackpot game. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the interest of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be enhanced. Further, by directing the player's interest to the big hit suggestion effect, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the length of each period.

  In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is difficult for the player to notice the length of the period is commonly executed.

  Further, in this feature 150IW, a fanfare period, an interval period and an ending period are set for each jackpot type, and the ratio of which jackpot type is determined for each set value is different, so that the jackpot When the winning probability (race rate) is a high setting, the average period of the fanfare period, interval period, and ending period is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. The fanfare period, interval period, and ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, any one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods with different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table in which determination values are set so that the ratio of selection of the fanfare period, interval period, and ending period in which relatively long periods are set is increased in the order of jackpot type A <B <C. Thus, the average value of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be increased in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  In this feature 150IW, in any case of jackpot type A to jackpot type C, the time-shortening control and the probability variation control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state is a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature 150IW). The game ends when the figure game is executed or when the big hit game state is entered before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. For example, the number of time-shortening control and probability variation control is different for each big hit type. Alternatively, in the case of a specific jackpot type, high-accuracy control and time reduction control that are executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state are continuously executed until the jackpot is generated again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. You may be made to do. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, the jackpot gaming state is a so-called consecutive resort state that occurs continuously without going through the normal state. This feature 150IW is configured so that the ratio of jackpots varies for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in addition to or in place of such a configuration, the probability variation continues. You may make it a rate (renso ratio) differ.

  Also, in this feature 150IW, there is no difference in the advantage (for example, the number of rounds during the big hit game, the presence / absence of time reduction control and probability variation control, the number of control, etc.) in the big hit type A to the big hit type C, the fanfare period, the interval Although the average period of the period and the ending period are different, for example, for each jackpot type, the number of rounds in the jackpot game, the presence or absence of short-time control and probability variation control, the number of times of control, and the advantage differ You may do it. In this case, the effect during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

  The feature unit 150IW exemplifies a mode in which, depending on the set value that is set, the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is determined at a different ratio from the big hit type A, the big hit type B, and the big hit type C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value, there is one jackpot type that cannot be determined among jackpot type A, jackpot type B, jackpot type C, or There may be multiple. In other words, depending on the set value, the determination rate of the jackpot type is different, either one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific jackpot type is 100% Included in determining by percentage.

  Further, in this feature 150IW, the case where the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period differ depending on the jackpot type is shown. However, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are not limited to such a mode. You may comprise so that a period may differ. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period corresponding to the set value may be determined uniformly according to any of the set values “1” to “3”. Further, for example, depending on whether the set value is “1” to “3”, the lottery process is performed with the selection probability according to the set value, and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are determined. May be.

  As described above, in the feature unit 150IW, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot differs according to the set value that has been set, so that the game entertainment can be improved. .

  In the feature unit 150IW, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random value for determining the jackpot type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is a special figure display result. You may determine using MR1 which is a random number value for determination.

  Further, in this feature 150IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is, the more advantageous for the player (the big hit probability and the small hit probability are increased, and the big hit type C as the big hit type is easily determined). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

  Further, in the feature unit 150IW, although the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gameability itself does not change, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of this, the gameability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the game performance (so-called probability variation loop type) in which the big hit probability in the normal state loops at a rate of 1/320 and the probability variation state is 65%, When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the big hit probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in a specific round during the big hit game. The game state after the big hit game is controlled to be a probable state based on passing through the predetermined count switch, while the rate at which the game ball passes through the count switch during the big hit game differs according to the big hit type If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50. As a gameability (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state based on the fact that the game ball passes through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 (during time-short control). Good. Furthermore, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same as 1 to 3 and the game is the same, the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than those in the case where these set values are any one of 1 to 3. Thus, a setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4).

  Further, in this way, when the gameability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different applications. Specifically, in the above-described example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is used as an effect switch (the game ball passes through the count switch). When the set value is 2 or 3, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (game ball). The game state may be used as a switch for controlling the game state to a probable change state or a big hit game state based on passing through the count switch.

(Small hit type judgment table)
FIG. 20C is an explanatory diagram illustrating a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. 20-5 (C), in this feature 150IW, small hit types A to C are provided as small hit types. As shown in FIG. 20-5 (C), in this feature 150IW, the determination ratios of the small hit types A to C are the same regardless of which of the setting values “1” to “3”.

  In addition, in this feature 150IW, regardless of which of the small hit types A to C, the open period and the number of open times of the big winning opening during the small hit game are the same, and the degree of advantage in the game is the same. .

(Fluctuation pattern judgment table)
The ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on a random number MR3 for variation pattern determination. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern determination table, the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, and the fluctuation display result is “small hit”. Are prepared in advance, and a loss variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “lost”. .

(Loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 20-6 is an explanatory diagram of a loss variation pattern determination table. In this feature 150IW, a period (hereinafter also referred to as a special period) from when the setting is changed at power-on to when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 30 times) (hereinafter also referred to as a special period) and other periods ( Hereinafter, it is configured to use different loss variation pattern determination tables.

  Specifically, in the special period, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A), and in the non-special period, the fluctuation pattern is shown in FIG. 20-6 (B). The variation pattern is determined using the second loss variation pattern determination table. In the feature unit 150IW, the period from when the setting is changed when the power is turned on to when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) is set as a special period. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the period until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as a special period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. Further, a special period may be used in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9 am to 11 am) using a real-time clock or the like. In addition, a period until the first big hit is generated may be a special period.

  Each of the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B) is a normal reach loss or a super reach loss in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3”. The determination value is assigned so that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, since the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value is suggested depending on the frequency of execution of normal reach and super reach.

  Also, the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A) has a higher ratio of normal reach loss than the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The determination values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between them becomes large. With such a configuration, in the special period, it becomes easier to recognize the difference in the frequency at which normal reach is executed than in the non-special period (that is, it becomes easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value). And can enhance the entertainment interests of the game.

  For example, the fluctuation pattern with super reach (or a specific fluctuation pattern) is determined at the same rate regardless of the setting value (or regardless of the difference between the special period and the non-special period). You may make it do. By doing so, the execution rate differs only for a specific fluctuation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) according to the setting value, and the setting value is suggested depending on the frequency with which the specific fluctuation pattern is executed. become. On the contrary, the selection ratio of the variation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be varied according to the set value.

  Also, the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss, except for non-reach loss, depending on the set value. The determination values are assigned so that the ratios (that is, the normal reach loss: super reach loss balance) are different. Specifically, in the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A), the ratio of the normal reach loss is remarkably increased in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3” (this example In the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (B), the normal reach loss is performed in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3”. The ratio is slightly higher (in this example, it is higher by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency of normal reach loss and super reach loss. Further, the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

  In this feature 150IW, setting suggestion effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set values. This is because the execution ratios of the normal reach loss and the entire super reach lose are different according to the set values. This is a concept including that the execution ratios of normal reach loss and super reach loss are different, and that only the normal reach loss is different depending on the set value.

  This feature 150IW displays a common background image on the image display device 5 when any of the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B) is used. Then, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 3, a common background image is displayed on the image display device 5, and the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Note that the dedicated background image may be displayed only during the special period or the period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 30 times). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest in a special period or a period from when the power is turned on until a variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 30 times).

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the example of the feature unit 150IW. For example, a special variation pattern that suggests a set value (for example, a variation pattern that is different from the normal variation pattern and has a set value 1 or 2) May be selected only in the special period, and the special variation pattern may be selected only in the special period. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to provide a motivation to play a game during a special period, and to enhance the gaming interest.

(Non-reach loss variation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 20-7 is an explanatory diagram of a non-reach loss variation pattern determination table. In this feature 150IW, a plurality of types of non-reach loss variation patterns having different variation times are provided, and when the variation pattern is determined to be non-reach loss, it is further determined to be any one of non-reach loss A to C. It is configured. Note that the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the reach variation pattern determination table illustrated in FIG. You may comprise so that it may determine.

  As shown in FIG. 20-7, in the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table, when the set value is “1”, the ratio determined as non-reach loss C (fluctuation time 7 seconds) is high, and the set value is “2”. ", The ratio determined to non-reach loss B (fluctuation time 8 seconds) is high, and when the set value is" 3 ", the ratio determined to non-reach loss A (fluctuation time 9 seconds) is high. A judgment value is assigned to.

  In this feature 150IW, when the set value is “1”, the ratio of non-reach loss C is high, and thus the variation time during non-reach loss is likely to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, since the ratio determined as non-reach loss A is high, the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average variation time becomes longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  This feature 150IW is configured such that the winning value (the payout rate) of the jackpot increases in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”, but at the same time, the set value is “1”. ”<“ 2 ”<“ 3 ”in order, the average variation time becomes longer. With such a configuration, when the probability of winning the big hit (race rate) is set high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling ability becomes too high. Can be prevented.

  The feature unit 150IW is configured such that the average variation time varies depending on the set value by changing the ratio of non-reach loses A to C with different variation times. A plurality of types of variation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) may be provided so that the variation times are different, and the selected ratio may be different depending on the set value. In addition, when multiple types of variation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided so that the variation time is different, it is possible to vary the display time of the decorative symbols, such as shaking display of high-speed variation display, etc. It is desirable that there is no difference in appearance.

  Further, in this feature 150IW, the average variation time is configured to be different depending on the set value. However, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, a fixed decorative design (final decoration pattern (final) is used. The period during which the stop symbol) is stopped and displayed may be different. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (outtake rate) of the jackpot is high, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed, that is, to delay the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

  In addition, the feature section 150IW is configured such that the variation time is set for each of the non-reach loses A to C, and the ratio of the non-reach loses A to C to be determined for each set value is different. When the probability (race rate) is a high setting, the average variation time is increased, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the variation time of each variation pattern for each set value May be set to be fixed, and the variation time may be longer when the winning probability (the winning rate) of the jackpot is higher.

  In this feature 150IW, a shortening variation pattern having a variation time shorter than that of other variation patterns is provided. For example, a variation pattern of shortened non-reach losing (variation time 1.5 seconds) shorter than non-reach losing A (variation time 9 seconds) is provided. The shortening variation pattern is configured to be used, for example, when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. In such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit or is close to the upper limit, the state is canceled and the variable display is efficiently performed (that is, the game is efficiently advanced). ) Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. Therefore, in this feature 150IW, the shortening variation pattern used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or larger than the predetermined number has a common variation time regardless of the set value. Regardless of the configuration of this feature 150IW, the variation time for the shortening variation pattern used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or greater than the predetermined number may be varied according to the set value.

(Setting confirmation process, setting change process)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 150IW will be described. FIG. 20-8 to FIG. 20-10 are flowcharts showing the game control main process in the characteristic section 150IW. In this feature 150IW, the processing of steps IWS001 to S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1 to S2 shown in FIG.

  When the initial setting is made, the CPU 103 waits for the activation of the effect control means for measuring the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) is activated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. A timer is set (step 150IWS003). In this case, a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the start of the effect control CPU 120 is set in the effect control means activation wait timer. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 150IWS004), and checks whether the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after subtraction is 0 (step 150IWS005). If the value of the effect control means activation wait timer is not 0, the process returns to step 150IWS004, and the processes of steps 150IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 150IWS006.

  By executing the processing of steps 150IWS003 to S005, the processing after step 150IWS006 is executed after waiting for the effect control CPU 120 to start up, and the setting value change and confirmation, RAM initialization and recovery processing, etc. are executed. Is done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a set value command, an initialization designation command, and a recovery command, which will be described later, are transmitted before the production control CPU 120 is activated. Occurrence can be prevented.

  Next, the CPU 103 resets a RAM clear flag indicating that the clear switch has been pressed when the power to the gaming machine is turned on (step 150IWS006).

  In this example, the RAM clear flag is not cleared in power-off processing (see step 150IWS031), which will be described later, but the RAM clear flag is once cleared by step 150IWS006 when power is supplied to the gaming machine, and then the clear switch is set. If it is, the case where it is configured to newly set the RAM clear flag (see steps 150IWS016 and S022) is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, if the RAM clear flag is cleared when the power-off process is executed, and the clear switch is set when the game machine is turned on, the RAM clear flag is newly set. Also good.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same processing as in step S4 (step 150IWS007). Specifically, in step 150IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 150IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 150IWS012.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 150IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data by the same process as step S5 (performed using the error detection code), and the data is normal. (Step 150IWS008). In step 150IWS008, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or checksum whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of stopping power supply. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 150IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 150IWS010.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 150IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is a value other than the setting values “1” to “3”. (Step 150IWS009). If the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is any of the setting values “1” to “3”, the process proceeds to step 150IWS011.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (N at step 150IWS008) or when the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is determined to be a value other than the setting values “1” to “3” (Y at step 150IWS009) The CPU 103 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the RAM 102 (step 150IWS010). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS012.

  When the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is any of the setting values “1” to “3” (N in Step 150IWS009), the CPU 103 is executing the setting changing process for changing the setting value. It is confirmed whether or not a setting changing flag indicating that the value is set is set (step 150IWS011). If the setting change flag is set (step 150IWS011; Yes), that is, if power interruption or the like occurs during the setting value change and the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the process proceeds to step 150IWS012.

  In step 150IWS012, CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from door opening sensor 150IW090 is on (step 150IWS012). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 150IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 150IW051 is on (step 150IWS013). If the setting key 150IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 150IWS014). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear 2 process (step 150IWS015).

  In this example, the RAM clear process includes a RAM clear 1 process (see step 150IWS051) and a RAM clear 2 process (see step 150IWS015) executed when a RAM abnormality occurs.

  In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102 and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, the area other than the area for storing the performance display information such as the link ratio, the role ratio, and the base, and the area for storing the set value in the storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared. Information for performance display such as role ratio and base, and information on set values are not cleared but are retained. Hereinafter, the storage area of the RAM 102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 1 process is referred to as a clear storage area 1.

  In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, areas other than the area for storing performance display information such as the link ratio, role ratio, and base in the storage area of the RAM 102 are cleared, and the performance display such as the link ratio, role ratio, and base is displayed. This information is not cleared but retained. In the RAM clear 2 process, the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Hereinafter, the storage area of the RAM 102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 2 process is referred to as a clear storage area 2. Therefore, in this example, the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102 cleared by the RAM clear 2 process is wider than the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102 cleared by the RAM clear 1 process.

  Then, the CPU 103 sets a RAM clear flag (step 150IWS016), and proceeds to step 150IWS025. The RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102.

  On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 150IW090 is OFF (N in Step 150IWS012), when the setting key 150IW051 is OFF (N in Step 150IWS013), or when the output signal from the clear switch is OFF ( In step 150IWS014 N), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a set value abnormality error command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 150IWS017).

  Next, the CPU 103 proceeds to a loop process of steps 150IWS018 to S020. In the loop process, the CPU 103 executes a 4 ms wait process for measuring a 4 ms wait time (step 150IWS018). When the wait time of 4 ms elapses, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 150IWS019 and performs a predetermined error display (step 150IWS019). For example, the CPU 103 performs control to display a display (for example, a display of “E”) indicating a RAM abnormality error on the display monitor 150IW029. In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to externally output a security signal to an external device such as a hall computer via an external terminal board (step 150IWS020). Then, the processing after step 150IWS018 is repeatedly executed.

  As a result of the processing of steps 150IWS007 to S020, in this feature unit 150IW, when the backup RAM is not normal (N in steps 150IWS007 and S008, Y in step 150IWS009), a power outage or the like occurred during the setting change. In the case (Y of step 150IWS011), the RAM is cleared on condition that the setting key 150IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on with the gaming machine frame 150IW003 opened, and the setting values after step 150IWS025 are set. Can be changed. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened and the setting key 150IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, the loop process is executed, the setting value cannot be changed, and the game control does not proceed.

  If the setting change flag is not set (step 150IWS011; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 150IWS021). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 sets a RAM clear flag (step 150IWS022).

  In this example, by executing the processing of step 150IWS022 and step 150IWS016, the RAM clear flag is set when the clear switch is first turned on when the power to the gaming machine is turned on. After that, there are multiple times to confirm whether or not the clear switch is turned on when the power is turned on until the timer interrupt is set and the timer interrupt process (game control process) is started. However, instead of directly checking the state of the clear switch, it is determined whether or not the clear switch is detected when the power is turned on by checking whether or not the RAM clear flag is set. (Refer to step 150IWS025, S034, S048).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 150IW090 is on (step 150IWS023). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 150IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 150IW051 is on (step 150IWS024). If the setting key 150IW051 is on, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 150IWS025). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a setting confirmation command indicating execution of the setting confirmation process for confirming the setting value to the effect control CPU 120 (step 150IWS026). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS030.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is set, CPU 103 performs control to transmit a setting change command indicating execution of setting change processing for changing the setting value to CPU 120 for effect control (step 150IWS027). ). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (step 150IWS028). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (that is, if abnormality of the RAM 102 is detected), the CPU 103 stores it in a setting value determination buffer (storage area for storing the current setting value provided in the RAM 102). The setting value is set to “1” (step 150IWS029). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS030. At this time, the CPU 103 resets the RAM abnormality flag.

  When the setting confirmation command or the setting change command is received, the production control board 12 performs control to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5). Or a predetermined sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a decorative light emitter such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner. In this case, the presentation control board 12 may be configured such that when a presentation operation button such as the push button 31B is pressed, “maintenance mode” or the like is displayed to shift to the maintenance mode. “Maintenance mode” refers to, for example, the date / time setting of the real-time clock, the occurrence history of various errors (recording when and what type of error occurred), the setting change history (when the setting value was changed and after the change This is a mode in which the recording of setting values can be confirmed. When the setting key 150IW051 is turned off and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are finished, the maintenance mode is also finished.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a 4 ms wait process for measuring a wait time of 4 ms (step 150IWS030). When the wait time of 4 ms elapses, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 150IWS031 and executes a power-off process (step 150IWS031). In the power-off process of step 150IWS031, the CPU 103 executes a process of detecting whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off process, when the CPU 103 detects that a power-off signal has been output, the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop process for storing necessary data (eg, backup flag, checksum) in the backup RAM area. To do.

  Next, the CPU 103 identifies the setting value stored in the setting value determination buffer, and displays the identified setting value on the display monitor 150IW029 (step 150IWS032). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to externally output a security signal to an external device such as a hall computer via the external terminal board (step 150IWS033).

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 150IWS034). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 150IWS043 as it is.

  If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a setting changing flag (step 150IWS035) and starts the setting changing process. Next, it is confirmed whether or not an initial set flag indicating that a value has already been set in the clear switch buffer for the first time since the gaming machine is turned on is set (step 150IWS036). The clear switch buffer is a buffer provided in the RAM 102 for setting the clear switch input state (whether it is in an on state or an off state). For example, the clear switch buffer is set to a value of “1” if the clear switch is on, and set to a value of “0” if the clear switch is off. If the initial set flag has been set (if the gaming machine has already been set to the initial value of the clear switch buffer since the power was turned on), the process proceeds to step 150IWS039.

  If the initial set flag has not been set (that is, the value has not been set in the clear switch buffer even after the gaming machine is turned on), the CPU 103 sets the clear switch buffer to the ON state. A value (for example, “1”) is set (step 150IWS037). Further, the CPU 103 sets an initial set flag (step 150IWS038).

  Next, the CPU 103 sets the value currently set in the clear switch buffer in the previous clear switch buffer (step 150IWS039). The previous clear switch buffer is a buffer that is provided in the RAM 102 and sets the clear switch input state (on state or off state) confirmed last time (4 ms before in this example). For example, the previous clear switch buffer is set to a value of “1” if the previously confirmed clear switch is on, and set to a value of “0” if it is off.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms the current input state of the clear switch, and sets the current input state of the clear switch in the clear switch buffer (step 150IWS040). Next, the CPU 103 sets the value previously set in the clear switch buffer to the off state (eg, “0”) and sets the value set to the clear switch buffer to the on state (eg, “1”). (Step 150IWS041).

  If the value previously set in the clear switch buffer is off and the value set in the clear switch buffer is on, the CPU 103 updates the set value displayed on the display monitor 150IW029. In addition to the display, it is stored in the set value determination buffer (updated and stored for the already stored set value) (step 150IWS042). For example, when “1” is displayed as the setting value on the display monitor 150IW029, the display on the display monitor 150IW029 is updated to “2”, and the setting value “2” is stored in the setting value determination buffer. If “2” is displayed as the setting value on the display monitor 150IW029, the display on the display monitor 150IW029 is updated to “3” and the setting value “3” is stored in the setting value determination buffer. When “3” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 150IW029, the display on the display monitor 150IW029 is updated to “1”, and the set value “1” is stored in the set value determination buffer.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 150IW051 is on (step 150IWS043). If the setting key 150IW051 remains on, the process proceeds to step 150IWS030, and the processing of steps 150IWS030 to S043 is repeatedly executed, and the setting confirmation processing and the setting change processing are repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the setting key 150IW051 is off, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation process and the setting change process, and proceeds to step 150IWS044.

  If the RAM clear flag is not set by executing the processing of steps 150IWS025 to S043 (that is, the clear switch is not turned on when the gaming machine is turned on) (steps 150IWS025 and S034). N), a setting confirmation command is transmitted (step 150IWS026), and only the setting confirmation processing (particularly step 150IWS032) is performed, and the setting change processing is not performed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear flag is set (that is, when the clear switch is turned on when the gaming machine is powered on) (step 150IWS025, Y of S034), a setting change command is transmitted (step 150IWS027). At the same time, a setting confirmation process (especially step 150IWS032) and a setting change process (especially 150IWS035-S042) are performed.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 30 seconds) in the security information timer for setting the security signal output period (step 150IWS044). In this example, when the setting confirmation process or the setting change process is executed when the power to the gaming machine is turned on, external output of the security signal is started by executing the process of step 150IWS033. In step 150IWS044, the security information timer is set, and the information output process (step S23) is executed based on the value of the security information timer, so that the security signal continues until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. And output externally.

  On the other hand, in this example, the security signal is output to the outside even when a RAM abnormality or the like occurs by executing the processing of step 150IWS020. In this case, the power supply to the gaming machine is reset. The security signal is continuously output until it is sent.

  Next, the CPU 103 resets the setting changing flag (step 150IWS045). Further, the CPU 103 deletes the setting value displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 (step 150IWS046). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set set value to the effect control CPU 120 (step 150IWS047).

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 150IWS048). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process proceeds to the recovery process of step 150IWS049. In this feature 150IW, the processing in steps 150IWS049 and S050 is the same as the processing in steps S6 and S7 shown in FIG.

  If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear 1 process and performs a process of clearing the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102 (150IWS051). In the feature unit 150IW, the processing in steps 150IWS052 to S055 is the same as the processing in steps S9 to S12 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 20-11 is an explanatory diagram of processing executed when the power is turned on. In this feature 150IW, as shown in FIGS. 20-11, when the setting key 150IW051 is on when the power is turned on (and the output signal from the door opening sensor 150IW090 is on), the clear switch is on. If so, a setting confirmation process (especially step 150IWS032) and a setting change process (especially 150IWS035 to S042) are executed and an initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 150IWS051)) is executed, and the clear switch is off. For example, only the setting confirmation process (particularly, step 150IWS032) is executed and the recovery process (step 150IWS049) is executed. If the setting key 150IW051 is off when the power is turned on, if the clear switch is on, only the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 150IWS051)) is executed. If the clear switch is off, Only the recovery process (step 150IWS049) is executed.

  Next, the display mode of the display monitor 150IW029 in the setting confirmation process and the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 20-12 (A) and 20-12 (B), when the power is turned off (turned off) by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game hall, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reduced. When the supply stops, the display on the display monitor 150IW029 ends. Note that when the big prize opening is open, such as during a big hit game or a small hit game, at the timing when the power is turned off, the supply of power to the solenoid 82 is stopped to close the big prize opening.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (C), when a store clerk or the like of the game hall turns on the power while operating the clear switch (Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 150IW051 is turned on. The CPU 103 executes a setting confirmation process on the condition that the setting value is set, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 150IW029.

  In the state in which the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 as described above, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (D), the CPU 103 detects the operation of the clear switch by the store clerk or the like in the game hall in the setting change process. Each time, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 is sequentially updated (for example, updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 →... Each time the clear switch is operated). Further, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (E), the CPU 103 turns off the display monitor 150IW029 based on the fact that the setting key 150IW051 is turned OFF by the operation of the store clerk or the like of the game hall, thereby The store clerk is notified that a new set value has been stored in the backup area of the RAM 102.

  Further, when the reserved storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the reserved storage is cleared. In addition, when the big winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 20-12 (A) (timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear process is executed when the setting is changed. Since the memory related to the jackpot is erased, the big prize opening remains closed. Thereafter, the CPU 103 ends the setting change process and enters a state in which a game can be performed, that is, a state in which a change display result, a jackpot type, a change pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, or the like can be executed.

  In the setting change process in the feature unit 150IW, the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 150IW029. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 in the setting change process, the most disadvantageous setting value for the player (“1” if the feature unit 150IW), or the most advantageous for the player A set value (“3” if this feature 150IW is used) may be displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-12, the setting value is displayed using the first display among the four-digit displays of the display monitor 150IW029 when the setting value is confirmed or changed. For example, the setting value may be displayed using the second and subsequent displays of the display monitor 150IW029. Further, for example, the setting value may be displayed by performing a dedicated 4-digit display on the display monitor 150IW029. In this case, for example, if the set value is “1”, the display monitor 150IW029 displays “−S−1” in four digits, and if the set value is “2”, “−S-2” is displayed on the display monitor 150IW029. If the set value is “3”, the display monitor 150IW029 may display “−S-3”. Further, for example, the setting value may be displayed on all four digits of the display monitor 150IW029. For example, if the setting value is “1”, the display monitor 150IW029 displays “1111” in four digits, and if the setting value is “2”, the display monitor 150IW029 displays “2222” in four digits. May be.

(Special design normal processing)
Next, the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the feature unit 150IW will be described. FIGS. 20-13 and 20-14 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total reserved memory number (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) (step 150IWS101). For example, the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number is confirmed.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the second pending storage number is 0 (step 150IWS102). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 has a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating "second" (step 150IWS103). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step 150IWS104).

  By performing the processing of steps 150IWS102 to S104, in the feature unit 150IW, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in preference to the variation display of the first special symbol. However, the display of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol are not limited to such a mode, for example, according to the start winning order in which the game balls have won the first start winning port and the second starting winning port. May be configured to execute.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 150IWS105). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 determines each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 150IWS106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and stores each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. Shift content. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 sets the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102. The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  Then, the CPU 103 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step 150IWS107). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 150IWS108). As already described, in the feature unit 112, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change process is executed when the power is turned on by executing the process of step 150IWS047. The set value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the processing of 150IWS108.

  In this example, the case where the same set value command is transmitted when the set value command is transmitted at step 150IWS047 and when the set value command is transmitted at step 150IWS108 is shown. You may comprise so that a command may be transmitted. For example, in step 150IWS047, a command (for example, commands 9E01 (H) to 9E03 (H)) corresponding to the setting values “1” to “3” is transmitted while the setting value is set in step 150IWS108. It may be configured to transmit identifiable variation pattern commands and prepare as many variation pattern commands as the number of set values (for example, for the set value “1”, commands 1C00 (H) ˜ are prepared as variation pattern commands. The command 2C00 (H) ˜ may be prepared as the variation pattern command for the set value “2”, and the command 3C00 (H) ˜ may be prepared as the variation pattern command for the set value “3”.

  Further, when configured as described above, even if the same variation pattern is used, if a variation pattern command different for each set value is transmitted, the total number of variation patterns × the number of set values (3 in this example) ) Fluctuation pattern commands are required, which may increase the data capacity. Therefore, for example, the configuration may be such that the set value command is transmitted only when a specific variation pattern is used, and only the variation pattern command corresponding to the specific variation pattern is provided with the variation pattern commands corresponding to the number of set values. Good. In this case, for example, the setting value command is transmitted only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation having the highest output frequency is used, and the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation are equivalent to the number of setting values. May be provided.

  Further, in this example, the case where the same set value command is transmitted for the set value command transmitted at power-on (see step 150IWS047) and the set value command transmitted at the start of fluctuation (see step 150IWS108) is shown. It is not limited to this aspect. For example, a set value command for power-on and a set value command for start of variation may be configured as separate commands, and different set value commands may be transmitted when the power is turned on and when change starts. Good.

  Also, in this example, a case is shown in which a set value command is transmitted separately from the variation pattern command at the start of variation, but it is configured to transmit an effect control command that uses both the variation pattern command and the set value command. Also good. In this case, for example, even if the variation pattern command specifies the same variation pattern A, the variation pattern command A-1 is transmitted when the setting value is “1”, and when the variation value command is “2”. The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and when the set value is “3”, the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 100 side is configured to be able to output the same variation pattern command (for example, variation pattern command A) regardless of the set value, and depending on which set value is on the effect control CPU 120 side. You may comprise so that which variation pattern is selected or the selection ratio may differ. For example, if the setting value is 1, the variation pattern A-1 is selected or the variation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the variation pattern A-2 is selected or the variation pattern A-2 is high. The ratio may be selected, or if the setting value is 3, the variation pattern A-3 may be selected or the variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high rate. In this case, for example, the variation patterns A-1 to A-3 have the same variation time, but may be configured so that the presence / absence or number of pseudo-continuations, presence / absence and type of reach are different. Also, in this case, for example, when the set value command cannot be received normally, the variation pattern A-1 is selected uniformly, or when the set value command cannot be received normally, the dedicated selection ratio The change pattern may be selected with the.

  Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of the change has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the set value command may be transmitted at the end of the change.

  In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control board 12 according to the current gaming state (step 150IWS109). In this case, for example, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a probability change state background designation command when in the probability variation state, and performs control to transmit the time variation background designation command in the time reduction state, and is in the normal state. In this case, control to send a normal state background designation command is performed.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. The big hit determination module compares a predetermined big hit determination value or small hit determination value (see FIG. 20-4) with the random value MR1, and determines that the big hit or small hit is determined if they match. A program to be executed. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination or a small hit determination process.

  If the value of the random number MR1 does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in Step 150IWS110), the CPU 103 performs a small hit determination process (Step 150IWS111). If it is determined to be a small hit (Y in step 150IWS111), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step 150IWS112), and proceeds to step 150IWS116.

  If the value of the random number MR1 does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step 150IWS111), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step 150IWS116.

  When the value of the random number MR1 matches any one of the big hit determination values (Y in step 150IWS110), the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step IWS113). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 20-5) to select a type corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area (“jacket type A ”,“ Big hit type B ”or“ big hit type C ”) is determined as the big hit type (step 150IWS114).

  Further, the CPU 103 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 150IWS115). For example, when the big hit type is “big hit type A”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “big hit type B”, “02” is set as the data indicating the big hit type When the big hit type is “big hit type C”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines a stop symbol for the special symbol (step 150IWS116). For example, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” as a special symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. For example, when the big hit flag is set, “7” as the big hit symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol. In addition, you may determine to the stop symbol of a different special symbol according to jackpot classification. For example, when the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 150IWS117).

(Direction mode change process)
Next, the operation of the effect control means in the feature unit 150IW will be described. FIG. 20-15 is a flowchart illustrating a part of the effect control main process in the feature section 150IW. In this feature part 150IW, in the effect control main process, when the effect control random number update process in step S77 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect mode change process for changing the effect mode (step 150IWS201). The process returns to step S73.

  In this feature section 150IW, it is possible to control to three types of effect modes of effect mode A to effect mode C. Depending on which effect mode is controlled, for example, the background screen of the image display device 5 is different, The types of characters appearing in the notice and reach effects are different. In the effect mode change process in step 150IWS201, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to change from the current effect mode to a different effect mode when a predetermined effect mode change condition is satisfied. For example, when the real-time clock is mounted on the production control board 12, the production mode may be changed based on a predetermined date or time based on the date / time information from the real-time clock. Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number may be executed, and the presentation mode may be changed based on the decision to change the presentation mode.

  In step 150IW201, when the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect mode, for example, a flag corresponding to the changed effect mode may be set, and the flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change may be reset. For example, when the mode is changed to the production mode A, the production mode A flag is set, and the production mode B flag or the production mode C flag before the change may be reset. For example, when the mode is changed to the production mode B, the production mode B flag may be set and the production mode A flag or the production mode C flag before the change may be reset. For example, when the mode is changed to the production mode C, the production mode C flag may be set and the production mode A flag or the production mode B flag before the change may be reset.

  The method of changing the production mode may be changed in a predetermined order, such as production mode A → production mode B → production mode C → production mode A →. You may make it change randomly from mode AC.

(Command analysis processing)

  20-16 and 20-17 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis processing (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 checks the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 150IWS301). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. If the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 150IWS302). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step 150IWS303). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 150IWS304), effect control CPU 120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 150). 150IWS305). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a set value command reception flag indicating that the set value command has been normally received at least once after the power to the gaming machine is turned on (step 150IWS306).

  In this feature 150IW, since the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up, the set value and the set value command reception flag stored in the set value storage area are supplied to the gaming machine. Cleared when is stopped. Therefore, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, no setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122, and the processing is started with the setting value command reception flag cleared. The Since the effect control board 12 is activated in a state where no set value is stored, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command even when the setting check process or the recovery process is executed. A configuration value command may be transmitted whenever the power is turned on.

  In addition, in the feature unit 150IW, the setting value command is transmitted when the gaming machine is turned on and the setting change process is performed. However, the setting value command is normal due to missing of the command or garbled data. If it cannot be received at the same time, the process of step 150IWS305 is not executed, and the set value is not stored in the set value storage area. However, in this feature 150IW, even if the set value command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, the set value command is transmitted for each variable display. Therefore, the process of step 150IWS305 is performed based on the received set value command. It is executed, and the set value can be stored in the set value storage area.

  Even if the set value command is received, the set value included in the set value command may be an abnormal value. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 reads the set value command, You may comprise so that it may be determined whether the setting value contained is a normal value. For example, in this example, the setting value is configured to be set to any value from “1” to “3”, but “5” or “10” is not set and includes a value that does not have a flaw. In such a case, the setting value included in the setting value command may be determined to be abnormal. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command, and when a new set value command is received thereafter, the newly received set value command is used. It may be configured to determine that a mismatch has occurred and to determine that there is an abnormality when the indicated set value does not match the previously stored set value. Even when it is determined that the setting value included in the setting value command is an abnormal value, it is determined that the setting value command has not been received normally, and the rendering is limited according to the processing method indicated by the feature unit 150IW. You may comprise.

(Initial outcome setting)
In the feature section 150IW, when either the initialization designation command or the recovery command is received from the main board 11 in the command analysis processing on the effect control board 12 side, the image display apparatus 5 performs a predetermined initial appearance. (Specifically, a combination of decorative symbols, which is displayed on the image display device 5 until the first variable display is started) is controlled (hereinafter also referred to as initial appearance effect).

  If the received effect control command is an initialization designation command or a command at the time of restoration (step 150IWS307), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 150IWS308). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the setting change process is executed and the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Based on the set value, the initial appearance determination table is used to determine whether the combination of an even number of initial designs (for example, “246” or “224”), which is a combination of even numbers of decorative symbols, and an odd number of decorative designs. A certain odd initial appearance (for example, “135”, “113”, etc.) and a special initial appearance that is a combination of decorative symbols including special symbols (for example, star symbols) are determined (step 150 IWS 309). . Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS314.

  FIG. 20-18 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the initial outcome determination table. In step 150IWS309, the lottery process based on the random number is performed according to the allocation of the determination value according to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area, using the initial appearance determination table shown in FIG. Determine the outcome. In the initial appearance determination table shown in FIG. 20-18 (A), the ratio determined for the odd initial appearance is higher in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3”. Therefore, in the image display device 5 before the game starts, if the odd initial outcome is displayed, the setting is changed, and the set value is advantageous compared to the case where the even initial outcome is displayed. It is suggested that it is set to. Also, as shown in FIG. 20-18 (A), the special initial appearance may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, if the special initial outcome is displayed on the image display device 5 before the game starts, it is determined that the setting change has been made and that the setting value is “3”. With such a configuration, interest can be given to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game, and a motivation for playing the game from the early hours of the business hours of the game shop can be given, which can enhance the interest.

  If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed but the set value command has not been received normally due to a command being missed or garbled), the production control The CPU 120 checks whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 150IWS310). Whether or not the production mode A is in effect can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the setting value is “1” and uses the initial output determination table shown in FIG. 20-18 (A) to determine the initial output (step 150IWS311). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS314.

  When the processing of steps 150IWS310 to S311 is executed, the feature unit 150IW does not normally receive the setting value command, and the setting value that is the most unfavorable setting in the production mode A The initial outcome is determined as being “1”. As shown in FIG. 20-18 (A), with respect to the set value “1”, the ratio determined to be the odd initial outcome is the lowest, and it is not determined to be the special initial outcome. Such a configuration reduces the situation where an odd initial appearance or special initial outcome is displayed and a player is discouraged even though an unfavorable set value is set, and the game is less interesting. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of

  If it is not the production mode A, the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current production mode is the production mode C (step 150IWS312). Whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set, for example. In the case of the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial outcome using the initial appearance determination table for the effect mode C (step 150IWS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS314.

  FIG. 20-18 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the initial appearance determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 20-18 (B), in the initial appearance determination table for the effect mode C, the odd number initial appearance is determined as compared with the setting value “3” that is most advantageous to the player. The percentage is low, and there is no case that it is determined as a special initial appearance.

  By executing the processing of steps 150IWS312 to S313, in the case where the setting value command cannot be normally received in the feature unit 150IW and in the effect mode C, an unfavorable setting value is set. In spite of this, the odd initial appearance and special initial outcome are displayed to reduce the situation where the player is discouraged and discouraged, and the fall of interest in the game can be prevented.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the initial outcome determined in steps 150IWS309, S311, and S313 (step 150IWS314).

  On the other hand, when it is not the production mode C (that is, when the current production mode is the production mode B), the production control CPU 120 determines the initial appearance as an even initial appearance, and the image display device 5. In step S150, control is performed to display the even initial number (step 150IWS315).

  When the processing of step 150IWS315 is executed, the feature unit 150IW uniformly displays the even-numbered initial outcome when the set value command cannot be received normally and the production mode is B. This can reduce the situation of disappointing the player by dismissing the odd initial appearance or special initial appearance even though an unfavorable set value is set, and prevent the interest in the game from being lowered. I have to.

  Even when the set value command is not normally received in the rendering mode B, the odd initial appearance symbols may be determined at a low rate. In this case, for example, by using a table in which the determination ratio of the odd initial appearance symbol is set to be lower overall than the setting value “1” of the initial appearance determination table shown in FIG. You may comprise so that an eye symbol may be determined.

  In this example, the case where the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode B is shown is a case where the even initial outcome is uniformly displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. . For example, when the set value command has not been received normally and in the production mode B, the set value command such as a combination of symbols “???” cannot be normally received as the initial appearance. It may be configured to display a dedicated initial outcome. Any combination of symbols that does not suggest any setting value in any form may be displayed as the initial appearance.

  Further, the processing when the set value command cannot be received normally (or when the set value cannot be stored normally) is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, when N is determined in step 150IWS308, the setting value “1” may be stored as a default in the setting value storage area to determine the initial outcome. Further, for example, a dedicated setting value (for example, setting value “4”) indicating that the setting value command has not been received normally can be stored in the setting value storage area to determine the initial output. Also good.

  If the received effect control command is a set value abnormality error command (step 150IWS 316), the effect control CPU 120 executes a set value abnormality error notification (step 150IWS 317). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a character display such as “There is a set value error” on the image display device 5, and sounds or error sounds indicating a set value error from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R. Control is performed so that the game effect lamp 9 or LED emits light with a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when the setting value abnormality error notification is performed, the loudspeaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound of the maximum volume or the error sound, or the game effect lamp 9 or the LED emits light with the maximum luminance (for example, the full color LED In this case, it is desirable to emit light in white).

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (effect control command for designating a variation pattern) (step 150IWS320), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command formed in the RAM. Store in the area (step 150IWS321). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 150IWS322).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (an effect control command for designating whether or not to make a big hit or whether to make a big hit, a big hit type or a small hit type) (step 150IWS323), for the production control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in a display result designation command storage area formed in RAM (step 150IWS 324).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (an effect control command for designating to display a decorative symbol stop symbol) (step 150IWS325), the effect control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag ( Step 150 IWS 326).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (an effect control command that designates the start of a jackpot game) (step 150IWS327), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 150IWS328).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (effect control command for designating the end of jackpot game) (step 150IWS329), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 150IWS330).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received effect control command or sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 150IWS331). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS301.

  The feature unit 150IW is configured not to display the odd initial number when the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on, but may be configured to display the odd initial number. Good. Also in this case, the ratio determined for the odd initial appearance may be different according to the set value (that is, the set value may be suggested).

  Further, for example, instead of or in addition to the odd initial appearance or even initial output, an initial output that denies the possibility of a specific setting value (for example, the possibility of a setting value of 1 is denied and set) It may be determined that the value 2 or the setting value 3 is determined), an initial appearance that the specific setting value is determined, and the like may be displayed according to the setting value. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, the possibility of being the setting value 1 is denied when the specific initial appearance is displayed by preventing the setting of the specific initial appearance, and the setting value 2 or It is determined that the setting value is 3. Also, for example, only when the setting value is 3, by determining the specific initial appearance, when the specific initial appearance is displayed, it is determined that the setting value is 3. . In addition, when determining the initial appearance, it may be determined as one of these initial outcomes by lottery. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

(Setting suggestion production)
The feature unit 150IW is configured to be able to change the set value, and as a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value, the pre-game suggestion effect that is executed before the start of the game, the initial appearance effect described above, , A design suggestion effect during a game that is executed during a decorative pattern change display), a setting suggestion based on the determination tendency of the variation pattern described above, and a jackpot suggestive effect that is executed during a big hit (for example, during a big hit game) Has been. In this feature 150IW, it is possible to execute the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect by a plurality of types of effect modes with different suggestion reliability. You may make it the reliability of suggestion differ for every. For example, the suggestion level before the game> the suggestion effect during the jackpot> the suggestion effect during the game or the suggestion effect before the game> the suggestion effect during the game> the suggestion effect during the jackpot> Suggestion during game> Direction suggestion during jackpot> Pre-game suggestion effect, or suggestion during jackpot suggestion> Indication suggestion during game> Indication before game suggestion The reliability of the suggestion may be increased. Moreover, you may comprise so that the execution ratio of each setting suggestion effect can be set. For example, the administrator of the gaming machine does not execute a part of the setting suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect or the initial appearance effect that suggests that the setting change has been performed) or all, or the execution ratio The setting may be changed so as to be lowered (or raised). For example, a setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and setting related to the setting suggestion effect by operating an operation means such as a push button 31B or an operation means such as a switch provided inside the gaming machine (only an administrator can operate). May be changed.

(Variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 20-19 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 150IWS501).

  When the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the customer waiting demonstration effect (step 150 IWS 502, step 150 IWS 503) and the image display device 5. Control to end display of the displayed puzzle display is performed (step 150IWS504). Note that the puzzle display is started by executing a process of step 150IWS518 described later.

  Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step 150IWS505), the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1” (step 150IWS506), and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

  If the variation pattern command reception flag is not set, the production control CPU 120 is not executing the customer waiting demonstration production (N in step 150IWS507), and whether or not the time measurement result by the time measuring means matches a predetermined condition. (Step 150IWS508). In step 150IWS 508, for example, when a timer (for example, set for 30 seconds) set when the previous variable display (display result “losing”) ends, it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. Further, even when the timer is not set (that is, after the power is turned on, the change display has not been executed once and before the game is started), it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. That is, when a predetermined period elapses without executing variable display (and when the game is not controlled to the big hit gaming state) or before the game is started, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the customer waiting demonstration effect is performed by the process described later. Will be executed.

  If the timekeeping result by the timekeeping means matches the predetermined condition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after power-on is 0 (step 150IWS509). That is, in step 150IWS509, it is confirmed whether the game has not yet started.

  If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 150IWS510). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode in the case of execution are determined according to the set value (step 150IWS511). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS516.

  In the feature section 150IW, when the customer waiting demonstration effect including the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the decoration lamp has a first special color (blue) different from the normal color (for example, white). When the controlled waiting demonstration effect of the aspect including the pre-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode is executed, the decoration lamp is controlled to the second special color (red), and the pre-game suggestion effect of the third effect aspect is controlled. When the customer waiting demonstration effect of the aspect including is executed, the decoration lamp is controlled to the third special color (rainbow color).

  20-20 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the pre-game suggestion effect determination table. In step 150IWS511, using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-20 (A), a lottery process based on a random number is performed according to the allocation of the determination value according to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area, The presence / absence and execution mode of the pre-game suggestion effect are determined. In the pre-game suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 20-20 (A), determination values are assigned so that the ratio at which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed increases in the order of the setting value “1” <“2” <“3”. It has been. In addition, the determination value is assigned so that the ratio determined in the second effect mode increases in the order of the setting value “1” <“2” <“3”. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the pre-game suggesting effect is executed, and that it is set to an advantageous set value by being executed in the second effect mode rather than the first effect mode. Become. In addition, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect, it is suggested that the setting has been changed when the power is turned on. Further, as shown in FIG. 20-20 (A), the third effect may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, it is determined that the setting change has been performed and that the setting value is “3”.

  If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed but the set value command has not been received normally due to a command being missed or garbled), the production control The CPU 120 checks whether or not the current production mode is the production mode A (step 150IWS512). Whether or not the production mode A is in effect can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 assumes that the setting value is “1” and uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. Then, the production mode is determined (step 150IWS513). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS516.

  When the processing of steps 150IWS512 to S513 is executed, in this feature 150IW, the setting value that is the most unfavorable setting when the setting value command cannot be received normally and the production mode is A. Whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIG. 20-20 (A), for the set value “1”, the ratio determined as the second effect mode is the lowest, and it is not determined as the third effect mode. Such a configuration reduces the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode or the third effect mode and the player is discouraged even though an unfavorable set value is set. In addition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in games.

  If it is not the production mode A, the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current production mode is the production mode C (step 150IWS514). Whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set, for example. In the case of the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C to determine the presence / absence of execution of the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode (step 150IWS515). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS516.

  20-20 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C. FIG. As shown in FIG. 20-20 (B), in the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, it is determined that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed as compared with the case of the setting values “2” and “3”. The ratio itself determined is low, the ratio determined as the first effect mode and the second effect mode is low, and the third effect mode is not determined.

  By executing the processing of steps 150IWS514 to S515, in this feature unit 150IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode C, an unfavorable set value is set. In spite of being present, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode, thereby reducing the situation where the player is disappointed and discouraged, thereby preventing the lowering of interest in the game.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect of the aspect including the pre-game suggestion effect determined to be executed in steps 150IWS511, S513, and S515 (step 150IWS516). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS518.

  On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step 150IWS517 as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect is limited so as not to be executed.

  By executing the processing of step 150IWS514, the feature unit 150IW does not execute the pre-game suggesting effect when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode B, The situation where the pre-game suggestion effect is executed despite the unfavorable set value being set and the player is discouraged is reduced, and the interest in the game can be prevented from being lowered.

  Even if the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect may be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, by using a table in which the execution ratio of the pre-game suggestion effect is set lower than the set value “1” of the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. You may comprise so that the presence or absence and kind of suggestion production may be determined.

  In addition, it is not restricted to the example shown to FIG. 20-20 (A), Only the specific production | generation aspect (for example, 2nd production | generation aspect) of several production | generation aspects seems to be performed according to a setting value. It may be.

  Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of setting value 1, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by setting the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) to be determined, The possibility of the value 1 is denied, and the setting value 2 or the setting value 3 is determined. In addition, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, the specific set value may be determined. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the set value 3, It is determined that the setting value is 3.

  In this feature 150IW, it is possible to execute the pre-game suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value. This is because the pre-game suggestion effect (the first effect mode, the second effect mode and the second effect mode) 3 execution modes are different), the execution ratios of the first production mode, the second production mode, and the third production mode are different according to the set value, and only the specific production mode is set according to the set value. It is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

  The feature unit 150IW is configured not to execute the pre-game suggesting effect when the setting is not changed when the power is turned on and the setting value command has not been received yet. Not limited to this, even when the setting is not changed, the pre-game suggestion effect may be executable. In this case, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode for execution may be determined at different rates depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

  For example, FIG. 20-20 (C) is a pre-game suggestion effect determination table used when a recovery command is received. When comparing the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-20 (A) and the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-20 (C), when a command at the time of recovery is received, that is, the setting change is made. When not being performed, the proportion of execution of the pre-game suggestion effect is low and the difference in execution proportion between the set values is also smaller than when the setting is changed. By doing in this way, the reliability of the suggestion by the pre-game suggestion effect can be made different when the setting change is performed and when it is not performed.

  If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is not 0, the CPU 120 performs control to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect in the form including the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect (excluding the pre-game suggestion effect) (step 150IWS517). Thereafter, the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

  When the processing of step 150IWS517 is executed, for example, in the image display device 5, an execution history indicating the number of executions of setting suggestion effects (indication effects during gaming or suggestion effects during jackpot), execution contents (effect mode during execution), and the like. A demonstration of waiting for a customer in a manner in which information is displayed is executed. When the process of step 150IWS517 is executed, a customer waiting de effect is executed, and when a predetermined operation (for example, operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) is performed during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect, In the image display device 5, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect may be displayed. In addition, on the side of the production control board 12, the number of executions and the execution contents (the production mode at the time of execution) of the setting suggestion effect (the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, the game suggestion effect, the big hit suggestion effect, etc.) are shown. Information may be stored, and an effect may be executed in which a setting value is estimated from the information and notified. In addition, this production | presentation alert | reports the setting expectation degree (or setting value estimated) calculated based on the predetermined reference | standard from the execution condition of the setting suggestion effect | action, and does not alert | report an actual setting value. .

  In this feature 150IW, the pre-game suggesting effect is executed only before the game is started by the processing of steps 150IWS509 to 150IWS516. In addition, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect is shown during the customer waiting demonstration effect by the process of step 150IWS517, but information related to the pre-game suggestion effect is excluded. With such a configuration, interest can be given to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game, a motivation for playing the game from the early hours of the business hours of the game shop can be given, and the interest can be enhanced. . Note that the pre-game suggesting effect is executed only in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9 am to 11 am) using, for example, a real-time clock or the like, without being limited to the example of the feature unit 150IW. Also good. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect may not include information related to the suggestion effect during game during the special period.

  In addition to the configuration of the feature section 150IW, the number of executions and execution contents of the setting suggestion effect are accumulated as execution history information, and a two-dimensional code including the execution history information is displayed on the image display device 5 at the end of the game. You may comprise. Further, when a player uses a portable terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function to photograph a two-dimensional code displayed on the gaming machine and transmits it to a web server on the Internet, the web server is based on the received information. The game history of the player may be managed, and a process of giving a predetermined privilege according to the game history may be performed. Further, the execution history information may be acquired by a player accessing the Web server using a mobile terminal (or analyzing a two-dimensional code) and displayed on a display device included in the mobile terminal. Moreover, the setting suggestion image which suggests a setting value may be displayed on the display apparatus with which a portable terminal is equipped, when a player reads the two-dimensional code containing execution history information using a portable terminal. For example, a setting value estimated based on a predetermined criterion is calculated from execution history information, and a setting suggestion image that suggests the calculated setting value (which is only an estimation and different from the actual setting value) is displayed. May be.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying the puzzle display on the image display device 5 based on the values of the first piece counter to the third piece counter (step 150IWS518).

  In this example, there may be a case where a puzzle effect is executed in such a manner that pieces of jigsaw puzzles are gradually gathered during the decorative pattern variation display. When a puzzle effect is executed, an effect that any one piece of the puzzles 1 to 3 is arranged one by one is executed each time the puzzle effect is executed. Then, after a plurality of puzzle effects are executed, it is suggested that the final value of the puzzle 1 is completed when all pieces are completed, and the setting value “1” is suggested. It is suggested that it is “2”, and it is suggested that the puzzle 3 has a set value “3” when all pieces are completed.

  Also, in this example, the puzzle is not always displayed with the variation display of the decorative pattern every time, but only the variation display determined to execute the puzzle effect (that is, the variation display in which any puzzle piece increases) Only) The puzzle is displayed. On the other hand, when the decorative symbol variation display is not executed and the customer waiting demonstration display is being displayed, the puzzle display is displayed on the image display device 5 by executing the processing of step 150IWS518, and the puzzle 1 is displayed. The gathering state of each piece of ~ 3 can be confirmed.

  The first piece counter is a counter for counting the number of pieces gathered in the puzzle 1. The second piece counter is a counter for counting the number of pieces gathered in the puzzle 2. The third piece counter is a counter for counting the number of pieces gathered in the puzzle 3. In this example, since the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up, the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped for the values of the first piece counter to the third piece counter stored in the RAM 122. It is sometimes cleared, and when the gaming machine is turned on, it starts from a state where the values of the first piece counter to the third piece counter are zero.

  In step 150IWS 518, an image of the puzzle 1 in which the number of pieces according to the value of the first piece counter is collected is displayed, and an image of the puzzle 2 in which the number of pieces according to the value of the second piece counter is collected is displayed. The puzzle display is displayed by displaying an image of the puzzle 3 in which the number of pieces corresponding to the value of the third piece counter is collected.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 20-21 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 150IWS601). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative pattern display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step 150IWS601 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Design) is determined (step 150IWS602). In other words, the processing of step 150IWS602 is executed by the production control CPU 120, so that the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the stop of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means A display result determining means for determining (design) is realized. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined decorative symbol stop pattern in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 150IWS602, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the decoration symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

  In step 150IWS 602, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a probable big hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which the three symbols are arranged in the same odd number as the stopped symbols. Also, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a normal big hit (non-probable big hit), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are arranged in the same even number as the stop symbols. To do.

  When the received display result designation command indicates a small hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of small hit symbols according to the small hit type designated by the display result designation command. . In this example, the combination of “135” is determined as the small hit symbol when the small hit type is A, and the combination of “357” is determined as the small hit symbol when the small hit type is B. In the case of the type C, a combination of “579” is determined as the small hit symbol.

  If the received display result designation command indicates a loss, a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative symbols in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined.

  If the pseudo-ream is designated by the variation pattern command, the CPU 120 for effect control, as a temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream in step 150IWS602 (for example, “223” or “445”). The combination of the jackpot symbol that is not reachable and the symbol that is shifted by one symbol) is also determined.

  The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbol and the numerical value are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, a stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the variation counter for counting the number of executions of the decorative symbol variation display after the game machine is powered on (step 150IWS603). In this example, since the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up, the value of the variation counter stored in the RAM 122 is cleared when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and the game It is assumed that when the machine is turned on, it starts from a state where the value of the variation counter is zero.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a game suggestion effect determination process for determining the presence / absence and effect mode of the game suggestion effect (step 150IWS604).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a puzzle effect setting process for setting the presence / absence of the puzzle effect and the effect mode (step 150IWS605).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the in-game suggestion effect or the puzzle effect if the execution of the variation pattern, the suggestion effect in game or the puzzle effect is determined (step 150IWS606). . Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts a process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 150IWS607).

  The process table is a table in which process data that is referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbols. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and performs control to display the decorative pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM 121 in the effect control board 12. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  If execution of the suggestion effect during game is determined in the game suggestion effect determination process at step 150IWS604, a process table including the suggestion effect during game is selected at step 150IWS606, and step 150IWS608 is selected according to the selected process table. Further, by executing the variable display effect process (step S172), the game suggestion effect is executed during the decorative symbol variation display.

  If execution of the puzzle effect is determined in the puzzle effect setting process at step 150IWS605, a process table including the puzzle effect is selected at step 150IWS606, and step 150IWS608 and variable display effect process are performed according to the selected process table. By executing (Step S172), a puzzle effect is executed during the decorative display variation display.

  Further, the CPU 120 for effect control is based on the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), and the effect device (the image display device 5 as the effect component, the effect component as the effect component). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts is executed (step 150IWS608).

  In this feature 150IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variable pattern command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command, but the effect control CPU 120 The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step 150IWS609). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “2” (step 150IWS 610), and ends the variable display start setting process.

(Indication suggestion processing during game)
FIG. 20-22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the game suggestion effect determination process (step 150IWS604). The in-game suggestion effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the in-game suggestion effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 selects the first in-game suggestion effect determination table (step 150IWS 702) when it is in the special period (Y in step 150IWS701), and is not in the special period. In the case (N in step 150IWS701), the second game suggestion effect determination table is selected (step 150IWS703). For example, a special period flag is set when a setting change end command or a set value command is received, and the special period flag is reset when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example). For example, by checking the state of the special period flag, it can be confirmed in step 150IWS 701 whether or not it is during the special period.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 150IWS704). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table, the presence / absence of execution of the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode for execution are determined (step 150IWS705).

  FIG. 20-23 (A) is an explanatory view showing a first game suggestion effect determination table used in the special period, and FIG. 20-23 (B) is a second game suggestion effect used in the non-special period. It is explanatory drawing which shows a determination table.

  20-23 (A) and (B), in the first and second game suggestion effect determination tables, the game suggestion effect is executed in the order of the set value “1” <“2” <“3”. The determination value is assigned so that the ratio of being processed becomes high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that an advantageous setting value is set by executing the suggestion effect during the game.

  In addition, with respect to the second effect mode (appearance of mini characters A and B), the ratio of execution in the order of the set value “1” <“2” <“3” is high, and the first effect mode (appearance of mini character A) The determination values are assigned so that the difference in the execution ratio between the set values becomes larger. In other words, the second rendering mode has a high degree of reliability with respect to being set to a set value that is more advantageous than the first rendering mode.

  In addition, in the first and second game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-23 (A) and (B), the game suggestion effect in the second effect mode with high reliability is executed only during the special period. It is configured as follows. With such a configuration, a motivation for playing a game during a special period can be provided, and the interest can be enhanced.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 20-23 (A) and (B), the third effect mode (appearance of character C) may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, the setting value “3” is determined by executing the game suggestion effect in the third effect mode.

  If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed but the set value command has not been received normally due to a command being missed or garbled), the production control The CPU 120 checks whether or not the current production mode is the production mode A (step 150IWS706). Whether or not the production mode A is in effect can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of execution of the game suggestion effect and the effect mode using the selected game suggestion effect determination table, assuming that the setting value is “1” ( Step 150IWS707).

  When the processing of steps 150IWS706 to S707 is executed, the feature unit 150IW cannot receive the setting value command normally and is in the rendering mode A, the setting value which is the most unfavorable setting. The presence / absence of execution of the game suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined as “1”. As shown in FIGS. 20-23 (A) and (B), for the set value “1”, the ratio of determining to execute the game suggesting effect is low and the ratio of determining the second effect mode. Is the lowest and is not determined to be the third effect mode. Such a configuration reduces the situation in which the suggestive effect during the game is executed by the second effect mode or the third effect mode and the player is discouraged even though an unfavorable set value is set. In addition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in games.

  If it is not the production mode A, the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current production mode is the production mode C (step 150IWS708). Whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set, for example. In the case of the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of execution of the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode using the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 150IWS709).

  FIG. 20-23 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 20-23 (C), in the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the proportion determined to execute the in-game suggestion effect is lower than in the case of the set value “3”. There is also no case of being determined as the third effect mode.

  By executing the processing of steps 150IWS708 to S709, in this feature 150IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the production mode C, an unfavorable set value is set. In spite of being present, the second effect mode and the third effect mode are executed to reduce the situation in which the suggestion effect during the game is executed and the player is discouraged, and the interest in the game can be prevented from being lowered.

  On the other hand, when it is not the production mode C (that is, when the current production mode is the production mode B), the production control CPU 120 ends the process as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, it is restricted so as not to execute the suggestion effect during the game.

  By executing the processing of step 150IWS708, the feature unit 150IW does not execute the suggestion effect during the game when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode B, Although a disadvantageous set value is set, a situation in which a suggestion effect during a game is executed and the player is disappointed and disappointed is reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

  Even if the set value command has not been normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during game may be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution ratio of the game suggestion effect is set lower overall than the setting value “1” of the game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 20-23 (A) and (B) is used. Thus, the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect during the game may be determined.

  In addition, it is not restricted to the example shown to FIGS. 20-23 (A) and (B), Only the specific production | generation aspect (for example, 2nd production | generation aspect) of several production | generation aspects is performed according to a setting value. You may make it a ratio differ.

  Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of setting value 1, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by setting the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) to be determined, The possibility of the value 1 is denied, and the setting value 2 or the setting value 3 is determined. In addition, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, the specific set value may be determined. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the set value 3, It is determined that the setting value is 3.

  In this feature 150IW, a game suggestion effect can be executed at a different rate according to the set value. This is because the game suggestion effect (the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the second effect mode). 3 execution modes are different), the execution ratios of the first production mode, the second production mode, and the third production mode are different according to the set value, and only the specific production mode is set according to the set value. It is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

  Note that the feature unit 150IW is configured to be able to execute an in-game suggestion effect in a common mode (for example, the first effect mode) in the special period and the non-special period, but is not limited to this configuration. It may be possible to execute a different suggestion effect during the game. For example, the size and color of the mini character A may be different between the special period and the non-special period.

  In addition, the feature unit 150IW is configured such that the presence / absence of execution of the suggestion effect during the game and the effect mode in the execution are different depending on whether the special period or the non-special period is set and the set value. However, in addition to such a configuration, for example, the variation time specified by the variation pattern, the presence or absence of reach production, the type of reach production, the presence or absence of pseudo-continuous production, the type of pseudo-continuous production, the display result is a big hit Depending on whether or not the game suggestion effect is executed, whether or not it is executed may be different.

  For example, the suggestion effect during game may be executable only when the variation pattern includes a reach effect (that is, the variation time is longer than that of the non-reach variation pattern). Further, for example, in the variation pattern including the super reach B and the variation pattern including the super reach A having a higher degree of expectation than the super reach B, the latter is likely to have a higher ratio of execution of the suggestion effect during the game. Alternatively, the degree of reliability when the in-game suggestion effect is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the in-game suggestion effect is executed increases, and the degree of reliability when the effect is executed is increased. You may make it high.

  Further, for example, in the variation pattern including the pseudo-continuous effect and the variation pattern not including the pseudo-continuous effect (or the number of pseudo-continuous times is smaller than that of the former), the former is more likely to execute the suggestion effect during the game. It may be made higher, or the reliability when the game suggestion effect is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the game suggestion effect is executed is increased and is executed. The reliability may be increased.

  In addition, for example, in the variation pattern in which the display result is a big hit and the variation pattern in which the display result is not a big hit, the former may have a higher ratio of executing the suggestion effect during the game. The degree of reliability when the medium suggestion effect is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the game suggestion effect is executed is increased, and the degree of reliability when the effect is executed may be increased. .

(Puzzle effect setting process)
20-24 and 20-25 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the puzzle effect setting process (step 150IWS605). In the puzzle effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not a puzzle completion flag indicating that any one of the puzzles 1 to 3 has been completed is set (step 150IWS801). If the puzzle completion flag is set, the puzzle effect setting process is terminated.

  By executing the process of step 150IWS801, in this example, a puzzle effect may be executed until one of the puzzles 1 to 3 is completed after the gaming machine is powered on. When one of the puzzles is completed, the puzzle effect is not executed thereafter (that is, only one puzzle is completed, and two or more puzzles are not completed).

  In addition, you may comprise so that two or more puzzles may be completed not only in the aspect shown in this example.

  If the puzzle completion flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the puzzle effect determination table for determining whether or not to execute the puzzle effect, and executes the puzzle effect. (Step 150IWS802). 20-26 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the puzzle effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 20-26, in this example, it is determined that the puzzle effect is executed with a probability of 1% when the decorative symbol variation display is executed.

  In general, when a game is continuously performed between the opening and closing of the amusement store, it is possible to display a variable display of decorative symbols about 3000 times at most (however, the gaming machine) There is a difference depending on the model of). In this example, the maximum number of pieces of the puzzles 1 to 3 is 5 pieces each, and when any one of the puzzles 1 to 3 is arranged, the puzzle is completed. In this example, even if the puzzle does not have all pieces, the judgment values are assigned so that it is easy to make the pieces up to about 3 to 4 pieces. Takes approximately 11 to 13 times to execute the puzzle effect, and since the determination ratio of execution of the puzzle effect is 1%, it generally takes approximately 1100 to 1300 times to display the decorative symbols. Therefore, in this example, after a game store is opened, one of the puzzles is designed to be completed approximately in the afternoon. In addition, you may comprise so that a puzzle may be completed in the morning not only in such an aspect.

  In addition, in this example, although the case where one type of puzzle production determination table shown in FIGS. 20-26 was used was shown, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, the execution ratio of the puzzle effect may be changed by using different puzzle effect determination tables according to the time zone, the number of executions of the variable display, and the setting by the game shop clerk.

  Moreover, in this example, although the case where the maximum number of pieces of the puzzles 1 to 3 was 5 pieces each was shown, it is not limited to such an aspect, for example, 3 pieces, 4 pieces, or 6 pieces or more You may comprise so that it may exist. Moreover, the maximum number of pieces of the puzzles 1 to 3 is not necessarily the same. For example, the maximum number of pieces of the puzzle 1 is 4 pieces, while the maximum number of pieces of the puzzle 3 is 5 pieces. The maximum number of pieces may be different for each puzzle.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is decided to execute the puzzle effect (step 150IWS803). If it is decided not to execute the puzzle effect, the puzzle effect setting process is terminated as it is. When it is decided to execute the puzzle effect, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the variation counter is 1000 or less (step 150IWS804). If the value of the variation counter is 1000 or less (that is, if the number of executions of the decorative symbol variation display after turning on the power of the gaming machine is 1000 or less), the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect of the puzzle effect. As a table for determination, puzzle effect mode determination table A is selected (step 150IWS805).

  If the value of the variation count counter is not 1000 or less (that is, if the number of executions of the decorative symbol variation display since the power-on of the gaming machine is greater than 1000), the effect control CPU 120 stores in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. It is confirmed whether or not the set value being set is “1” (step 150IWS806). If the set value is “1”, the CPU 120 for effect control selects the puzzle effect mode determination table B as a table for determining the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS807).

  If the set value is not “1”, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122 is the set value “2” (step 150IWS808). If the setting value is “2”, the CPU 120 for effect control selects the puzzle effect mode determination table C as a table for determining the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS809).

  If the setting value is not “2” (that is, if the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122 is the setting value “3”), the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the puzzle effect. As the table, the puzzle effect mode determination table D is selected (step 150IWS810).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the puzzle effect mode determination table selected in steps 150IWS805, S807, S809, and S810, and determines the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS811).

  20-27 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the puzzle effect mode determination table. Among these, FIG. 20-27 (A) shows a specific example of the puzzle effect mode determination table A selected in step 150IWS805. FIG. 20-27 (B) shows a specific example of the puzzle effect mode determination table B selected at step 150IWS807. FIG. 20-27 (C) shows a specific example of the puzzle effect mode determination table C selected in step 150IWS809. FIG. 20-27 (D) shows a specific example of the puzzle effect mode determination table D selected in step 150IWS810.

  As shown in FIGS. 20-27, each of the puzzle effect mode determination tables A to D has determination values for the puzzle effect 1, the puzzle effect 2, and the puzzle effect 3 as the puzzle effect effect modes (types). Is allocated. Puzzle effect 1 is a puzzle effect performed in a manner in which one piece of puzzle 1 among puzzles 1 to 3 is increased. Moreover, the puzzle effect 2 is a puzzle effect performed in a mode in which one piece of the puzzle 2 among the puzzles 1 to 3 is increased. Moreover, the puzzle effect 3 is a puzzle effect performed in a mode in which one piece of the puzzle 3 among the puzzles 1 to 3 is increased.

  As shown in FIG. 20-27 (A), in the puzzle effect mode determination table A, the determination ratio of the puzzle effect 3 is 2 to 3% higher than the determination ratios of the other puzzle effects 1 and 2. Therefore, in this example, after turning on the power of the gaming machine, the ratio of increasing one piece of the puzzle 3 by executing the puzzle effect 3 is slightly high until the decorative symbol change display is executed 1000 times. Therefore, in this example, for example, even if the set value is a setting value “1” having a low advantage, the number of pieces of the puzzle 3 having a high advantage is up to a predetermined number (for example, 3 to 4). Is easy to get together.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 20-27 (B), in the puzzle effect mode determination table B, the determination ratio of the puzzle effect 1 is 1% higher than the determination ratios of the other puzzle effects 2 and 3. Therefore, in this example, after the game machine is turned on, after the decorative symbol variation display is executed 1000 times and the set value “1” is set, the puzzle effect 1 is executed and the puzzle is displayed. The rate at which one piece increases by one is slightly higher.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 20-27 (C), in the puzzle effect mode determination table C, the determination ratio of the puzzle effect 2 is 1% higher than the determination ratios of the other puzzle effects 1 and 3. Therefore, in this example, after the game machine is turned on, after the decorative symbol variation display is executed 1000 times and the set value “2” is set, the puzzle effect 2 is executed and the puzzle is displayed. The rate at which two pieces increase by one is slightly higher.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 20-27 (D), in the puzzle effect mode determination table D, the determination ratio of the puzzle effect 3 is 1% higher than the determination ratios of the other puzzle effects 1 and 2. Therefore, in this example, after the gaming machine is turned on, after the decorative symbol variation display is executed 1000 times and the set value “3” is set, the puzzle effect 3 is executed and the puzzle is displayed. The rate at which 3 pieces increase by 1 is slightly higher.

  In addition, in this example, as shown to FIGS. 20-27, in any puzzle production | presentation mode determination table AD, the execution ratio of any one of the puzzle productions 1-3 is 1 to 3 more precisely than other puzzle productions. It is easy to gather all pieces of the puzzles 1 to 3 to some extent, and it is a puzzle other than the puzzle that finally has the maximum number (5 pieces in this example) of the puzzles 1 to 3. However, at least 3 to 4 pieces are easily arranged.

  The configuration of the puzzle effect mode determination table is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, it is configured to determine the effect mode of the puzzle effect using a different puzzle effect mode determination table according to the setting of the game clerk, and is configured to be able to change the selection ratio of the effect mode of the puzzle effect. May be. For example, depending on the setting, the puzzles 1 to 3 may be arranged so that the pieces are evenly arranged to some extent, or a particular puzzle may be arranged or changed more easily than other puzzles.

  Next, the CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether or not the puzzle effect 1 is determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS812). If the puzzle effect 1 is determined, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122 is the setting value “1” (step 150IWS813). If the set value is “1”, the process proceeds to step 150IWS815.

  If the set value is not “1”, the production control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the first piece counter is 4 (step 150IWS814). If the value of the first piece counter is 4, the process proceeds to step 150IWS819 without proceeding to steps 150IWS815 to S818. In other words, in this case, the value of the first piece counter being 4 means that up to four pieces of the puzzle 1 are gathered, and when the puzzle effect 1 is executed, the fifth piece is aligned and the puzzle 1 is Although it is completed, the set value set is not the set value “1”, and the set value suggested in the completed puzzle does not match the set value actually set. The process is not shifted to the process of S818, and the execution of the puzzle effect is canceled.

  When the set value is “1” (Y at step 150IWS813) or when the value of the first piece counter is not 4 (N at step 150IWS814), the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the puzzle effect 1 is executed. A puzzle effect 1 execution flag is set (step 150IWS815). In this example, in step 150IWS606 of the variable display start setting process, based on the fact that the puzzle effect 1 execution flag is set, the process table including the puzzle effect 1 is selected, and steps are performed according to the selected process table. By executing 150IWS608 and the variable display effect process (step S172), the puzzle effect 1 is executed during the decorative symbol variation display. The puzzle effect 1 execution flag is reset when the variation display of the decorative symbols is terminated.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the first piece counter (step 150IWS816), and checks whether the value of the first piece counter after the addition is 5 (step 150IWS817). If the value of the first piece counter is 5, the effect control CPU 120 sets a puzzle completion flag (step 150IWS818).

  Next, the CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether or not the puzzle effect 2 is determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS819). If the puzzle effect 2 is determined, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122 is the setting value “2” (step 150IWS820). If the set value is “2”, the process proceeds to step 150IWS822.

  If the set value is not “2”, the production control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the second piece counter is 4 (step 150IWS821). If the value of the second piece counter is 4, the process proceeds to step 150IWS826 without proceeding to steps 150IWS822-S825. That is, in this case, the value of the second piece counter being 4 means that up to four pieces of the puzzle 2 are gathered, and when the puzzle effect 2 is executed, the fifth piece is aligned and the puzzle 2 is Although it is completed, the set value set is not the set value “2”, and the set value suggested in the completed puzzle does not match the set value actually set. The process is not shifted to the process of S825, and the execution of the puzzle effect is canceled.

  When the set value is “2” (Y at step 150IWS820) or when the value of the second piece counter is not 4 (N at step 150IWS821), the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the puzzle effect 2 is executed. A puzzle effect 2 execution flag is set (step 150IWS82). In this example, in step 150IWS606 of the variable display start setting process, a process table including puzzle effect 2 is selected based on the fact that the puzzle effect 2 execution flag is set, and the steps are performed according to the selected process table. By executing 150IWS608 and the variable display effect processing (step S172), the puzzle effect 2 is executed during the decorative symbol variation display. The puzzle effect 2 execution flag is reset when the variation display of the decorative symbols is terminated.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the second piece counter (step 150IWS823), and checks whether the value of the second piece counter after the addition is 5 (step 150IWS824). If the value of the second piece counter is 5, the effect control CPU 120 sets the puzzle completion flag (step 150IWS825).

  Next, the CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether or not the puzzle effect 3 is determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS826). If the puzzle effect 3 is determined, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122 is the setting value “3” (step 150IWS827). If the set value is “3”, the process proceeds to step 150IWS829 as it is.

  If the set value is not “3”, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the third piece counter is 4 (step 150IWS828). If the value of the third piece counter is 4, the process of steps 150IWS829 to S832 is not shifted to, and the puzzle effect setting process is terminated. That is, in this case, the value of the third piece counter being 4 means that up to four pieces of the puzzle 3 are gathered, and when the puzzle effect 3 is executed, the fifth piece is aligned and the puzzle 3 is Although completed, the set value set is not the set value “3”, and the set value suggested in the completed puzzle does not match the set value actually set. The process is not shifted to the process of S832, and the execution of the puzzle effect is canceled.

  When the set value is “3” (Y at step 150IWS827) or when the value of the third piece counter is not 4 (N at step 150IWS828), the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the puzzle effect 3 is executed. A puzzle effect 3 execution flag is set (step 150IWS829). In this example, in step 150IWS606 of the variable display start setting process, based on the fact that the puzzle effect 3 execution flag is set, a process table including the puzzle effect 3 is selected, and steps are performed according to the selected process table. By executing 150IWS608 and the variable display effect processing (step S172), the puzzle effect 3 is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. It should be noted that the puzzle effect 3 execution flag is reset when the variation display of the decorative symbols is terminated.

  Next, the production control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the third piece counter (step 150IWS830), and checks whether the value of the third piece counter after the addition is 5 (step 150IWS831). If the value of the third piece counter is 5, the effect control CPU 120 sets a puzzle completion flag (step 150IWS832).

  In this example, the setting value suggested in the completed puzzle does not match the setting value actually set by executing the processing of steps 150IWS813, S814, S820, S821, S827, and S828. In this case, the case where the puzzle effect is canceled so that such a situation does not occur is shown, but it is not limited to such a processing mode. For example, step 150IWS811 may be executed again, and the effect form of the puzzle effect may be re-determined until the effect aspect of the puzzle effect that does not become inconsistent is determined. Further, for example, it may be configured to re-determine the effect mode of the puzzle effect by using a table excluding the effect mode of the puzzle effect that becomes inconsistent.

  Further, in this example, the case where control is performed so that the setting value suggested in the completed puzzle does not coincide with the setting value actually set is shown. Instead, the setting value suggested in the completed puzzle may not necessarily match the setting value actually set. For example, when the set value is “3”, the rate at which the puzzle 3 is completed is the highest, but the puzzle 1 and the puzzle 2 may be completed.

  Also, for puzzle effects, it is checked whether the set value command reception flag is set (whether the set value command has been received normally). If the set value command has not been received normally, Similar to the determination of the previous suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect, the execution of the puzzle effect may be limited.

(Determination processing during big hit)
FIG. 20-28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit effect determination process. The big hit effect determination process is executed in the big hit release pre-processing (step S114). In the big hit effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 150IWS901). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. The presence / absence of execution of the big hit suggestion effect is determined, and the effect mode in the case of execution is determined (step 150IWS902). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS907.

  In step S150IWS902, when the variation display is a specific time period (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific time period) from the game start time to the specific time (100 times in this example), it is shown in FIG. 20-29 (A). When the big hit suggestion effect determination table is selected, and it is not during the specific period, the second big hit suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-29B is selected. Then, based on the selected big hit suggestion effect determination table and the set value, the presence / absence of execution of the big hit suggestion effect and the effect mode in the case of execution are determined. The “game start time” here refers to the time when the first fluctuation display is started after the power is turned on, but is not limited to this, for example, the first fluctuation after the end of the previous villa. It may be the time when the display is started, or may be the time when the first variable display is started after the end of the customer waiting demonstration effect. In addition, in this feature 150IW, the period from when the game is started to when the change display is executed a specific number of times (in this example, 100 times) is set as the specific period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. However, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period from when the game is started until the variation display is executed a specific time (100 times in this example) may be set as the specific period. Further, for example, the specific period is divided into a plurality of periods, and the first specific period (the period from when the game is started until the fluctuation display is executed 50 times) and the second specific period (the 51st fluctuation after the game starts). It is also possible to use a big hit suggestion effect determination table in which the presence / absence of the big hit suggestion effect and the determination ratio of the effect mode are different from the display to the execution of the 100th variation display).

  In both the first and second big hit suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-29 (A) and (B), the big hit indication suggestion is executed in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3”. The determination value is assigned so that the ratio of being processed becomes high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that an advantageous setting value is set by executing the big hit suggestion effect.

  Moreover, about the 2nd production mode and the 3rd production mode, the ratio which is executed in order of setting value “1” <“2” <“3” is high, execution ratio between setting values in specific period and non-specific period The determination value is assigned so that the difference between the two becomes large. That is, in the specific period, the big hit suggestion effect having higher reliability than the non-specific period is executed. With such a configuration, a motivation for playing a game during a specific period can be given, and interest can be enhanced. Not only the configuration of the feature unit 150IW but the big hit suggestion effect (or a specific effect mode thereof) may be executed only in a specific period and not in a non-specific period.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 20-29 (A) and (B), the fourth effect mode may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, when the big hit suggestion effect is executed in the fourth effect mode, it is determined that the setting value is “3”.

  In the feature section 150IW, when the big hit suggestion effect is executed in the third effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (A1), the decorative symbol that is a big hit is stopped and displayed on the image display device 5. After that, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (B1), a speech C image (“high setting !?”) 150IW102 is displayed.

  Further, when the big hit suggestion effect is executed in the fourth effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (A1), after the decorative symbol that is a big hit is stopped and displayed on the image display device 5, As shown in 20-31 (C1), a serif D image (“high setting confirmed”) 150IW105 is displayed.

  If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed but the set value command has not been received normally due to a command being missed or garbled), the production control The CPU 120 checks whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 150IWS903). Whether or not the production mode A is in effect can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of execution of the jackpot suggestion effect and the effect mode using the selected jackpot suggestion effect determination table, assuming that the setting value is “1” ( Step 150IWS904). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS907.

  When the processing of steps 150IWS903 to S904 is executed, the feature unit 150IW does not normally receive the set value command, and if it is the production mode A, the set value that is the most disadvantageous setting The presence / absence of execution of the big hit suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIGS. 20-29 (A) and (B), for the set value “1”, the ratio determined as the second effect mode or the third effect mode is the lowest, and the fourth effect mode is determined. There is no case. With such a configuration, despite the setting of an unfavorable setting value, the second stage, the third stage, and the third stage are executed with the big hit suggesting stage and the player is disappointed. It is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in games.

  If it is not the production mode A, the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current production mode is the production mode C (step 150IWS905). Whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set, for example. If it is the production mode C, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the big hit suggestion production and the production mode using the big hit suggestion production determination table for the production mode C (step 150IWS906). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS907.

  20-29 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot suggesting effect determination table for effect mode C. FIG. As shown in FIG. 20-29 (C), in the big hit suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the ratio itself determined to execute the big hit suggestion effect is low, and the setting value is “2” or “3”. Compared with, the ratio determined as the second effect mode or the third effect mode is low, and the fourth effect mode may not be determined.

  By executing the processing of steps 150IWS905 to S906, in this feature unit 150IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode C, an unfavorable set value is set. In spite of being present, the second stage, the third stage, and the third stage can be used to reduce the situation in which the big hit suggesting stage is executed and disappointing the player and discouraging the game. I have to.

  On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step 150IWS907 as it is. That is, in the case of the production mode B, it is restricted so as not to perform the big hit suggestion production.

  By executing the process of step 150IWS905, the feature unit 150IW does not execute the suggestion effect during the big hit when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode B, Although a disadvantageous set value is set, a situation in which a suggestion effect during a big hit is executed and the player is discouraged is reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

  Even in the case where the set value command has not been normally received in the effect mode B, it may be configured to be able to execute the big hit suggestion effect at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution ratio of the big hit suggestion effect is set lower than the set value “1” of the big hit suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 20-29 (A) and (B) is used. The presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect during the big hit may be determined.

  In addition, it is not restricted to the example shown to FIGS. 20-29 (A) and (B), Only the specific production | generation aspect (for example, 3rd production | generation aspect) of several production | generation aspects is performed according to a setting value. You may make it a ratio differ.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 20-29 (A), when the big hit is made in a specific period, the suggestion effect during the big hit is always executed, but it may not be executed at a low rate. May be. In this case, you may make it vary the ratio which is not performed according to a setting value. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 20-29 (B), the ratio that the big hit suggestion effect is not executed is the same regardless of the set value, but the ratio that is not executed according to the set value is different. You may make it let.

  Further, in this feature 150IW, when a big hit is made in a specific period, the big hit suggestion effect is executed as the setting suggestion effect. In addition to or instead of such a configuration, A setting suggestion effect (for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a dialogue image indicating a set value is displayed) may be executed based on the predetermined condition being satisfied in a specific period. In this case, the predetermined condition may be satisfied, for example, when the number of executions of the reach effect or the pseudo-continuous effect reaches a predetermined number, or when a specific super reach effect or notice effect is executed.

  In this feature 150IW, it is possible to execute a big hit suggestion effect at a different rate depending on the set value, but this is a big hit suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, third The execution ratio of the production mode and the fourth production mode is different, the execution ratios of the first production mode, the second production mode, the third production mode, and the fourth production mode are different according to the set value, and the set value. This is a concept including that the execution ratio differs only in a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the accessory effect (step 150IWS907).

  Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (A1), it is assumed that a movable member 150IW101 is provided above the image display device 5. In such a configuration, when an accessory effect is executed, control is performed so that the movable member 150IW101 moves to the front surface of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (B2).

  As shown in FIGS. 20-30 (A1) and (B2), when the effect effect is executed, the movable member 150IW101 moves to the front surface of the image display device 5. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the position where the serif image is displayed. In this feature 150IW, the jackpot suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at different timings during the fanfare period in the jackpot game, so the movable member 150IW101 that has actually moved to the front of the image display device 5 The dialogue image displayed by the medium suggestion effect is not obscured. However, if the movable member 150IW101 is operated by the effect effect during the fanfare period, the player's attention may be directed to the movable member 150IW101, and the dialogue image displayed by the suggestion effect during the big hit may be overlooked. Therefore, in step 150IWS907, by using the accessory effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-29 (D), when the big hit suggestion effect is executed, the accessory effect is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from becoming difficult to recognize and reducing the interest. Also, with such a configuration, even if the big hit suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at the same timing, it is possible to prevent the big hit suggestion effect from becoming difficult to recognize.

  When the execution of the big hit suggestion effect is determined, the execution timing of either the big hit suggestion effect or the accessory effect is changed (for example, the accessory effect is performed during the fanfare period, It is also possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from being difficult to recognize. When the execution of the big hit suggestion effect is determined, the operation mode of the movable member 150IW101 is changed (for example, control is performed so as not to stop at the position overlapping the speech image by the big hit suggestion effect), or the big hit The display position of the dialogue image by the medium suggestion effect may be changed to prevent the big hit suggestion effect from becoming difficult to recognize. In addition, when the execution of the big hit suggestion effect is determined, the execution of the accessory effect may be limited by reducing the execution ratio of the accessory effect. Moreover, you may make it restrict | limit execution of an effect production only for a specific period. Moreover, not only the example shown to FIG. 20-29 (D), but also when a big hit suggestion production | presentation is performed, you may make it perform an accessory effect in a low ratio.

  Next, when the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the accessory effect (N in Step 150IWS908), the presence / absence of the light guide plate effect is determined (Step 150IWS909).

  Here, on the front surface of the image display device 5, there is provided a light guide plate 150IW103 having translucency capable of transmitting light, and a light emitter provided so that light can be incident from an end surface of the light guide plate. In addition, it is assumed that there is provided a reflection portion that reflects light incident on the inside of the light guide plate 150IW103 from the end surface of the light guide plate 150IW103 by the light emitter and emits the light to the front surface of the gaming machine. Then, by causing the light emitter to emit light, it is possible to execute a light guide plate effect in which light is emitted from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate 150IW103 to the front surface of the gaming machine. In such a configuration, when the light guide plate effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (B3), light is emitted to the front surface of the gaming machine from the reflective portion provided on the light guide plate 150IW103, and “big hit” Appears. Further, during execution of the light guide plate effect, it is difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 5.

  In step 150IWS909, by using the light guide plate effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-29 (E), the light guide plate effect is executed at different ratios depending on the presence / absence of the big hit suggestion effect and the effect mode when executed. The Specifically, when the suggestion effect during the jackpot of the first effect mode is executed, the ratio of the light guide plate effect being high is high, and the suggestion during the jackpot of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is performed. When the effect is executed, the ratio at which the light guide plate effect is executed is reduced. That is, when the big hit suggestion effect during the big hit of the production mode that is not suggested to be an advantageous setting value is executed, the ratio that the light guide plate effect is executed is high, and the big hit suggestive effect is difficult to visually recognize. Yes. For example, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (B4), the light guide plate effect is executed when the serif A image (“Setting is ...”) 150IW104 is displayed by the big hit suggestion effect in the first effect mode. Then, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the serif A image. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game entertainment from being lowered due to the suggestion effect during the big hit of the effect mode that is undesirable for the player. In addition, when the big hit suggestion effect during the big hit of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is executed, the execution timing of either the big hit suggestion effect or the light guide plate effect is changed (for example, the light guide plate). The production may be performed during the fanfare period and the suggestion effect during the big hit may be performed during the ending period).

  Next, an effect aspect of the puzzle effect will be described. FIG. 20-32 to FIG. 20-34 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of the effect aspect of the puzzle effect. As shown in FIG. 20-32 (A), in the decorative display variation display that has not decided to execute the puzzle effect, the effect display of the puzzle effect is not displayed on the image display device 5, and the left, right and right decorative symbols are displayed. The fluctuation display is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 20-32 (B), the variation time is finished and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and further, as shown in FIG. 20-32 (C), the variation of the next decorative symbol is displayed. It is assumed that display has started. In the example shown in FIG. 20-32 (C), it is assumed that the puzzle effect execution is determined and the puzzle effect 2 is determined as the effect form of the puzzle effect when the decorative symbol variation display is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 20-32 (C), for example, a puzzle effect effect screen (puzzle effect screen) 150IW106 is displayed at the lower left of the display screen of the image display device 5, and the puzzle effect is started.

  20-32 (D) is an enlarged view of the puzzle effect screen 150IW106 shown in FIG. 20-32 (C). As shown in FIG. 20-32 (D), the puzzle effect screen 150IW106 displays a puzzle 150IW107 (Puzzle 1), a puzzle 150IW108 (Puzzle 2), and a puzzle 150IW109 (Puzzle 3). In the example shown in FIG. 20-32 (D), the puzzle 150IW107 (Puzzle 1) is already in a state where one piece 150IW107-1 has already gathered, and the puzzle 150IW108 (Puzzle 2) still has one piece gathered. The puzzle 150IW109 (Puzzle 3) shows a case where two pieces are already gathered.

  Next, based on the fact that the puzzle effect 2 is determined, as shown in FIG. 20-33 (E), one new piece 150IW 108-1 is flying in the puzzle effect screen 150IW106, and the puzzle 150IW107 ( An effect is performed in which one of the puzzle 1) to the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) is struck as to whether the new puzzle fits. Then, as shown in FIG. 20-33 (F), the new piece 150IW108-1 finally fits in the puzzle 150IW108 (Puzzle 2), and the number of pieces of the puzzle 150IW108 (Puzzle 2) increases by one. Production is performed. Then, when the variation display of the decorative design is finished, the puzzle effect screen 150IW106 is deleted, and the puzzle effect is ended.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 20-33 (G), it is assumed that the execution of the puzzle effect has not been determined in the next variable display of decorative symbols, and as shown in FIG. 20-33 (G), the image display device In 5, the effect display of the puzzle effect is not displayed, and the variation display of the left middle right decorative symbol is displayed.

  Then, after that, the puzzle effect is not executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is not executed, and as shown in FIG. 20-33 (H), the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed on the image display device 5. Suppose that it is in a state In this example, when the customer waiting demonstration display is in progress, as shown in FIG. 20-33 (H), for example, a puzzle display screen (puzzle display screen) 150IW110 is displayed at the lower left of the display screen of the image display device 5. Then, the display of the puzzle display is started, and the current state of gathering pieces of the puzzle 150IW107 (Puzzle 1), the puzzle 150IW108 (Puzzle 2), and the puzzle 150IW109 (Puzzle 3) is displayed.

  After that, it is assumed that the game is started again, the decorative symbol variation display is executed a plurality of times, and the puzzle effect is also executed a plurality of times. Then, when starting to display the variation display of a certain decorative pattern, it is assumed that the execution of the puzzle effect is determined, and that the puzzle effect 2 is determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect, and the puzzle effect screen 150IW106 is displayed. It is assumed that the puzzle production has started. FIG. 20-34 (I) is an enlarged view of the puzzle effect screen 150IW106 displayed in the variation display of the decorative symbols. In the example shown in FIG. 20-34 (I), the puzzle 150IW107 (Puzzle 1) is already in the state of three pieces 150IW107-1, and the puzzle 150IW108 (Puzzle 2) is already in the state of four pieces. The puzzle 150IW109 (Puzzle 3) shows a case where four pieces have already been gathered.

  Next, based on the fact that the puzzle effect 2 is determined, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (J), in the puzzle effect screen 150IW106, one new piece 150IW108-5 flies and the puzzle 150IW107 ( An effect is performed in which one of the puzzle 1) to the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) is struck as to whether the new puzzle fits. Then, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (K), the new piece 150IW108-5 finally fits in the puzzle 150IW108 (Puzzle 2), and the piece of the puzzle 150IW108 (Puzzle 2) increases by one. Production is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (K), the maximum number of pieces in the puzzle 150IW108 (Puzzle 2) is five, and the puzzle 150IW108 (Puzzle 2) is completed. A character display such as “Puzzle 2 completed!” Is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (L), “2” appears in the completed puzzle 150IW108 (Puzzle 2), and the set value is the set value “2”. Is suggested.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-34 (L), the case where the number “2” is displayed directly suggests that the set value is “2” is shown. It cannot be caught. For example, instead of such a direct expression, a picture corresponding to the set value “2” (a picture reminiscent of the set value “2”) is displayed when the puzzle is completed. It may be.

  20-32 to 20-34 show the case where the puzzle 2 is completed and suggested to be the set value “2”, but the set value “1” and the set value “3” are suggested. Also in the case of doing, the puzzle effect is executed in the same effect mode.

  In this feature 150IW, the effect effect and the light guide plate effect are executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect during the big hit. For example, an error displayed on the image display device 9 when an error occurs The display is also executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. That is, the error display is displayed in preference to the big hit suggestion effect (or the pre-game suggestion effect or the in-game suggestion effect). With such a configuration, occurrence of an error can be appropriately notified. In addition, when a predetermined effect that can be executed simultaneously with the big hit suggestion effect (for example, a specific effect aspect of the fanfare effect) is provided, and the predetermined effect is an aspect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestion effect. The priority may be given to the suggestion effect during the big hit. Specifically, when the image displayed on the image display device 5 by the predetermined effect is in a mode in which it is difficult to recognize the image displayed by the big hit suggestion effect, it is displayed by the big hit suggestion effect. You may make it display an image preferentially. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit.

  Further, in this feature 150IW, decorative symbols are variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, but the decorative symbols are variably displayed by driving a drum-shaped movable body having decorative symbols arranged on the surface. (That is, it may be applied to a so-called drum-type game machine). Alternatively, the decorative symbol may be variably displayed by driving a belt-shaped movable body having a decorative symbol on the surface (that is, the decorative symbol may be applied to a so-called belt reel type game machine). In such a drum-type or belt-reel type gaming machine, the drum-like or belt-like movable body performs a characteristic operation different from the normal time at the start of the first fluctuation after the setting change (or the feature). May occur). Therefore, in the first-time fluctuation after changing the setting, a light guide plate effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable body at the start of the fluctuation may be executed (or the execution ratio is increased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the setting has been changed.

  Further, in this feature 150IW, the effect production and the light guide plate production are configured so as to reduce the visibility of the suggestion effect during the big hit, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, For example, the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced by executing the accessory effect or the light guide plate effect. Also in this case, the visibility may be lowered at a high rate when an undesirable suggestion is made to the player. For example, when even-numbered initial outcomes are displayed, when the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, or when the suggestion effect during game of the first effect mode is executed, the visibility is reduced. As described above, it is possible to increase the ratio of executing the effect effect in which the movable member operates and the light guide plate effect in which characters and pictures are displayed by the light guide plate. Further, the present invention is not limited to an effect effect or a light guide plate effect, but includes an effect including a control for outputting a predetermined sound, a control for vibrating the movable member and the stick controller 31A, and a control for causing a decorative light emitter such as a decoration LED to emit light in a predetermined manner By performing the above, the player's attention may be directed to others, and the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced (or made difficult to notice).

  Further, in addition to the setting suggestion effect of the feature unit 150IW, a simultaneous effect executed based on a measurement result (measurement result using a measurement timer or a real-time clock set when the power is turned on) is executed in a specific manner. Thus, the setting may be suggested.

  Further, a setting suggestion effect (for example, a predetermined image) that suggests setting according to the number of times that the variable display is continuously executed without the hold memory being 0 or the number of start winnings exceeding the upper limit hold memory number is generated. Display control, output control of a predetermined sound, light emission control of a predetermined lamp, etc.) may be executed.

  Further, a setting suggestion effect (for example, display control of a predetermined image, output control of a predetermined sound, predetermined control, etc.) based on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B in a predetermined operation effective period. (E.g., light emission control of the lamp) may be executed.

  The characteristic portion 150IW has been described above with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention can be changed or added without departing from the scope of the present invention. included.

(Modification 1)
For example, in the feature 150IW, the security cover 150IW500A is fixed to the outer frame 150IW001a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 150IW003 side. Also good. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 20-35 (A) and 20-35 (B) as a modified example 1, a security cover 150IW500B composed of a short piece 150IW500Ba and a long piece 150IW500Bb is attached to, for example, a substrate case 150IW201. Thus, the right end portion of the long piece 150IW500Bb is provided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction between a covering position covering the right side portion of the substrate case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 and a covering releasing position on the right side of the covering position.

  On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 150IW201, so that the setting is made through the through-hole 150IW500Bc formed in the left part of the long piece 150IW500Bb. The key 150IW051 may be operated. That is, in the first modification, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the sliding movement in the left-right direction with respect to the substrate case 150IW201 is performed with the security cover 150IW500B (long piece 150IW500Bb) covering the setting key 150IW051. By being regulated, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in a regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is released by sliding the security cover 150IW500B to the right with respect to the board case 150IW201 to release the state of covering the setting key 150IW051. It is possible to make a state in which the restriction state can be released (change to an allowable state).

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 20-35 (A) and 20-35 (B), when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the protruding dimension of the security cover 150IW500B from the board case 150IW201 is the length L1. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the projecting dimension of the security cover 150IW500B from the board case 150IW201 is extended to a length L2 by sliding the security cover 150IW500B with respect to the board case 150IW201. (L2> L1).

  That is, as shown in FIG. 20-36 (A), when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is rotated about a predetermined rotation axis and opened, the security cover 150IW500B has a protruding dimension from the board case 150IW201. By sliding the board case 150IW201 until the length becomes L2 (putting the pachinko gaming machine 1 into an allowable state), the game shop clerk and the like operate the setting key 150IW051 to set the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 Can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state, as shown in FIG. 20-36 (B), the security cover 150IW500B is moved to the board case 150IW201 until the protruding dimension from the board case 150IW201 becomes the length L1. On the other hand, if it is not slid (if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed to the restricted state), the security cover 150IW500B comes into contact with the front end portion of the outer frame 150IW001a, and it is impossible to close the gaming machine frame 150IW003. It has become.

  For this reason, in the present first modification, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 150IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state, so that the setting key 150IW051 is covered by the security cover 150IW500B. Forgetting to do it, that is, closing the gaming machine frame 150IW003 without restricting the operation on the operation unit can be prevented, and the security can be improved.

  In the state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 150IW500Ba is disposed between the outer frame 150IW001a and the gaming machine frame 150IW003, thereby restricting movement in the left-right direction from the covering position. However, the security cover 150IW500B may be moved in the left-right direction as long as the state in which the setting key 150IW051 is covered by the security cover 150IW500B is maintained.

(Modification 2)
Furthermore, as a form in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 150IW003 side, as shown in FIGS. 20-37 (A) and 20-37 (B) as a second modification, the left end of the security cover 150IW500C is attached to the gaming machine. Between the covering position covering the right side of the substrate case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 and the covering releasing position rotated from the covering position around the pivot 150IW500Cd which is provided on the back side of the frame 150IW003 and faces the vertical direction It may be pivotally supported by. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the front end portion of the short piece 150IW500Ca is locked to the locking portion 150IW500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 150IW001a, and the long piece 150IW500Cb is placed on the back side of the setting key 150IW051. It is only necessary that the rotation from the covered state to the back side is regulated.

  When the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the state where the setting key 150IW051 is covered is released by rotating the security cover 150IW500C around the pivot 150IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the board case 150IW201. Can be operated. In other words, in the second modification, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the pachinko gaming machine is controlled by the rotation of the security cover 150IW500C (long piece 150IW500Cb) covering the setting key 150IW051. 1 is maintained in a regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500C is rotated around the pivot 150IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the board case 150IW201 to release the state where the setting key 150IW051 is covered. By doing so, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be brought into a state where it can be released from the restricted state (can be changed to an allowable state).

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-38 (A), the security cover 150IW500C in the second modification is rotated around the pivot 150IW500Cd (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is allowed), so that The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by the store clerk operating the setting key 150IW051. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state, as shown in FIG. 20-38 (B), the security cover 150IW500C is rotated clockwise in plan view, and the setting key is set by the security cover 150IW500C. If 150IW051 is not covered (if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed to a restricted state), the security cover 150IW500C will come into contact with the front end of the outer frame 150IW001a, making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 150IW003. It has become.

  For this reason, in the second modification, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 150IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permitted state, and therefore the cover of the setting key 150IW051 by the security cover 150IW500C Forgetting to do it, that is, closing the gaming machine frame 150IW003 without restricting the operation on the operation unit can be prevented, and the security can be improved.

(Modification 3)
In addition, in the feature 150IW, a mode in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass door frame The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed by opening 150IW003a. When the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 150IW003a in this way, the modified example 3 is shown in FIGS. 20-39 (A) to 20-39 (C). In this way, a through-hole 150IW003b is formed in the lower part of the gaming machine frame 150IW003, and the setting key 150IW051 can be operated through the through-hole 150IW003b. In this case, the mounting surface such as an IC on the main board 11 is arranged toward the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting key 150IW051 is arranged on the surface of the main board 11 opposite to the mounting surface. .

  When the setting key 150IW051 can be operated through the through-hole 150IW003b as described above, a door body 150IW003c that can open and close the through-hole 150IW003b is provided, and the setting key 150IW051 is closed when the door body 150IW003c is closed. Operation may be restricted. 20-39 (B) and 20-39 (C), when the door body 150IW003c is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 150IW003, the door body is closed by closing the glass door frame 150IW003a. Since 150IW003c is sandwiched between the glass door frame 150IW003a and the gaming machine frame 150IW003, the setting key 150IW051 is strongly prevented from being illegally operated when the glass door frame 150IW003a is closed. And security can be improved.

As described above, this feature 150IW includes the first invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for a player, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A . Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes that a display control of an effect based on a set value is performed and a process of displaying character images of giraffe, elephant, and lion is executed at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing may be, for example, when the special symbol fluctuates, etc., but it may be regular (when there is a total fluctuation, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.) or irregularly (such as when winning a random lottery) It is described that it may be. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, in the gaming machine configured to be settable to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, the effect is not necessarily achieved. Can not be increased. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, a setting value “1” to a setting value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, puzzle effect) (for example, the process table including the puzzle effect is selected at step 150IWS606 in the CPU 120 for effect control, and step 150IWS608 and variable display effect processing (step S172) are performed. Part to execute)
The suggestion effect execution means includes:
When a display in which a plurality of specific components (for example, each piece of the puzzle 150IW107 (Puzzle 1)) are collected is performed, the maximum number (for example, 5 in the puzzle 150IW107 (Puzzle 1)) is specified as the suggestion effect. And the puzzle 150IW107 (Puzzle 1) is completed, and the setting value “1” is suggested).
When a display in which a plurality of special components (for example, each piece of the puzzle 150IW109 (Puzzle 3)) are gathered is performed, the maximum number (for example, 5 in the puzzle 150IW109 (Puzzle 3)) is used as the suggestion effect. And the puzzle 150IW109 (Puzzle 3) is completed and the setting value “3” is suggested).
The specific component and the special component are displayed in a different manner depending on the set value that is set (for example, when the set value is “1” as shown in FIG. 20-27 (B)) , The execution ratio of the puzzle effect 1 is slightly high, and pieces of the puzzle 150IW107 (Puzzle 1) are likely to gather slightly, for example, when the set value is “3” as shown in FIG. (The execution ratio of the puzzle production 3 is slightly high, and the pieces of the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) are likely to gather slightly.)
According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be settable to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, the effect is provided Can be increased.

  In this example, the case where an image such as a puzzle piece is displayed as a specific component or a special component has been shown. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to be able to suggest a set value that is set by outputting sounds of various musical instruments as specific components or special components and arranging the sound output.

  Further, in this example, as a specific example of an aspect in which “the display in which the specific component and the special component are collected according to different modes depending on a set value that is set” is illustrated in FIGS. Although the case where the puzzle pieces corresponding to the set values are configured so as to be slightly easier to gather is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, depending on the set value, puzzles can be collected up to the maximum value (5 in this example) to determine whether or not the puzzle is completed, how puzzle pieces are gathered in the middle, Various modes are conceivable, such as making the ease of obtaining pieces different.

  Further, in this example, a case has been described in which a puzzle effect is executed during the display of variation of decorative symbols and an effect of collecting puzzle pieces is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, during the jackpot game, some kind of puzzle effect may be executed to produce an effect of collecting puzzle pieces.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the specific suggestion effect when the set setting value is a specific set value (for example, the set value “1”), but cannot execute the special suggestion effect (for example, The CPU 120 for effect control can execute puzzle effects 1 by executing steps 150IWS815 to S818 if Y is determined in step 150IWS813, but if it is N in step 150IWS813 and Y is determined in step 150IWS814, step 150IWS815 is executed. ~ Cancel the puzzle production without moving to S818)
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be settable to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, the effect Can be increased.

  In this example, when the setting value is “1”, it is ensured that no other than puzzle 1 is completed, and when the setting value is “2”, other than puzzle 2 is not completed, In the case where the set value is “3”, the case where the configuration other than the puzzle 3 is not completed is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the setting value “1” has a particularly low advantage, the puzzle 3 corresponding to the setting value “3” having a high advantage is limited so that it may not be completed. You may comprise so that the puzzles other than the puzzle corresponding to the set value set may be completed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means determines whether or not to perform a display for collecting the specific component or the special component based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, winning the lottery process for the presence / absence of the puzzle effect in step 150IWS802). Production (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-33 (E) and FIG. 20-34 (J)), one new piece flies and any of puzzle 150IW107 (Puzzle 1) to puzzle 150IW109 (Puzzle 3) It is described that a new puzzle may be played), and according to such a configuration, any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is described. In the gaming machine configured to be settable to the set value, the effect of production can be enhanced.

  In this example, a case where one new piece is flying and an effect is performed in which the puzzle 150IW107 (Puzzle 1) to the puzzle 150IW109 (Puzzle 3) is struck as to whether the new puzzle fits is executed. It is not limited to such a mode. For example, even if you perform an effect that says whether or not you can acquire a piece, or if you execute an effect that indicates which one of those pieces can be acquired after displaying multiple pieces Often, various aspects are possible.

  In this example, as the “predetermined condition”, a lottery process is performed for each variable display, and the predetermined condition is established based on winning the lottery process. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the puzzle effect may be executed as if the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the big hit, or the puzzle effect may be executed as if the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the appearance of the predetermined notice effect. Various modes can be considered as the predetermined condition.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can perform display for collecting the specific component and the special component regardless of the set value being set (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-27). In any of the puzzle production mode determination tables A to D, the execution ratio of any one of the puzzle productions 1 to 3 is only 1 to 3% higher than the other puzzle productions. Some pieces are easy to gather)
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be settable to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, the effect Can be increased.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means performs a display (for example, the puzzle display screen 150IW110 shown in FIG. 20-33 (H)) that can confirm the state of the specific component and the special component being collected (for example, for effect control) (The part which performs step 150IWS518 in CPU120)
According to such a configuration, the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted. That is, in this example, the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted by showing the state of puzzle pieces being collected. In particular, in this example, when the number of fluctuations is 1000 times or less, puzzle pieces corresponding to the setting value “3” having a high advantage are easily gathered, and thus the setting has a high advantage for the player. It can be expected that the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

  In this example, it is shown that the puzzle display screen 150IW110 is displayed during the customer waiting demonstration display so that the acquisition status of each puzzle piece can be confirmed and the status of the completed puzzle can be confirmed. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the acquisition status of each puzzle piece or the status of the completed puzzle may be incorporated into the interface screen and displayed at all times so that it can be confirmed at all times.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means performs a display in which a special component corresponding to a high advantage is collected up to a predetermined number (for example, 3 to 4) even if the set value is a setting value with a low advantage. (For example, as shown in FIG. 20-27 (A), in the puzzle effect mode determination table A, the determination ratio of the puzzle effect 3 is 2 to 2 compared with the determination ratios of the other puzzle effects 1 and 2). 3% higher, and after the game machine is turned on, the rate at which the puzzle effect 3 is executed and the number of pieces of the puzzle 3 increases by 1 is slightly higher until the decorative symbol change display is executed 1000 times)
According to such a configuration, the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the first invention,
Information output means (for example, a portion for executing steps 150IWS047 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. Prepared,
Suggestion execution means
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect) (for example, a step in the effect control CPU 120) 150IWS510-S516, S704-S709, S901-S906)
The suggestion effect execution means includes:
As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) Pre-implying effects, suggesting effects during games, and suggesting effects during big hits)
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (By executing steps 150IWS515, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, the suggestion effect in the game, and the big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode are not executed)
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be settable to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, Decline in interest can be prevented.

  In this feature 150IW, for example, the RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 is not backed up, and the value of each piece counter is reset when the gaming machine is turned off. It is assumed that each puzzle is activated in a state where it is reset when it is inserted. It should be noted that at least a part of the RAM 122 may be backed up to back up the value of each piece counter, and in this case, each piece counter stored in the RAM 122 in response to a resetting operation by the game clerk. You may comprise so that a value etc. can be reset.

  Further, in the above case, for example, the gaming machine may be configured to start in a state where some pieces of some puzzles are gathered when the game store is opened. In this case, the set value may be suggested according to which puzzle piece is activated in the assembled state. Further, there may be a pattern in which the gaming machine is activated in a state where any puzzle has already been completed when the game shop is opened.

In addition, the feature 150IW includes the second invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for a player, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A . Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes that setting change processing is executed when the power switch is operated to the ON side with the front frame opened and the setting key switch operated to the ON side. . Further, it is described that the RAM area other than the setting value storage means is cleared in the setting change process. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, in the gaming machine configured to be settable to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, it is not always appropriate. Processing may not be possible. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, a setting value “1” to a setting value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
An operating means (for example, a clear switch) provided to execute an initialization process (for example, RAM clear 1 process, RAM clear 2 process) based on the operation when power supply to the gaming machine is started. When,
Specific information storage means (for example, RAM 122) capable of storing specific information (for example, RAM clear flag) indicating that the operation means has been operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started;
When executing a plurality of processes including a setting value changing process for changing a setting value, a process executing means for executing the process using the specific information a plurality of times (for example, step 150IWS025 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) A portion that executes S034 and S048). According to this feature, any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player is set. In the gaming machine configured to be settable, the processing can be suitably performed. In particular, in a process that requires a certain amount of processing time for changing a set value, it is preferable to store specific information (in this example, a RAM clear flag), check the RAM clear flag, and execute the process. It can be performed.

  In this example, as a process to be executed “using specific information a plurality of times”, a setting confirmation command or a setting change command is transmitted in steps 150IWS026 and S207 depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set in step 150IWS025. Control whether to execute the process of changing the setting value of steps 150IWS035 to S042 depending on whether the RAM clear flag is set in step 150IWS034, or clear the RAM in step 150IWS048 Although the case where the restoration process of steps 150IWS049 and S051 or the RAM clear 1 process is executed according to whether or not the flag is set is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be controlled whether or not to enable the operation switch immediately before the operation of changing the setting value depending on whether or not the specific information (RAM clear flag) is set.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention,
In the set value changing process, the process executing means changes the set value based on the operation of the operating means (for example, a part for executing steps 150IWS039 to S042 in the game control microcomputer 100).
According to such a configuration, since the operation means can be also used, an increase in cost can be suppressed. In other words, in this example, the clear switch can be used as the operation means for performing the operation for initializing the RAM 102 and the operation means for performing the setting value changing operation, thereby suppressing an increase in cost. it can.

  In addition, in this example, it is necessary to confirm the state of the clear switch multiple times when turning on the power to the gaming machine by using the clear switch also, so when turning on the power to the gaming machine, first turn on the clear switch. When the RAM clear flag is detected, the RAM clear flag is set. Thereafter, whether or not the clear switch for initializing the RAM 102 has been operated is checked to see if the RAM clear flag is set. The operation of the clear switch for the change operation can be suitably performed by checking the state of the clear switch itself.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention,
The normal initialization process (for example, RAM clear 1 process) is executed based on the operation means being operated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, while the power supply to the gaming machine is started. An initialization processing execution means (for example, a part for executing steps 150IWS015 and S051 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that executes initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 2 processing) at the time of abnormality based on the detection of the abnormality )When,
A first storage area (for example, a clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102) in which stored contents are cleared in the normal initialization process;
A second storage area (for example, a clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102) in which stored contents are cleared in the initialization process at the time of abnormality,
The specific information storage means can store specific information in the second storage area (for example, the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102).
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured to be settable to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
Based on the fact that the state of the operation means has been switched from the off state to the on state, it comprises determination means (for example, a part for executing step 150IWS041 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can determine that the operation means has been operated,
The process execution means can change the setting value based on the determination that the operation means has been operated by the determination means in the setting value changing process (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can change the setting value in step 150IWS041). If Y, execute step 150IWS042),
The determination means determines whether or not the operation means has been operated by setting an initial state of the operation means when power supply to the gaming machine is started (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100). (If step 150IWS036 is N, step 150IWS037 is executed)
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured to be settable to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention,
Timer interrupt processing execution means (for example, a part for executing steps S21 to S27 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a timer interrupt process each time a predetermined timer interrupt occurs,
The process execution means executes the process by using the specific information a plurality of times until the timer interrupt process is executed after power supply to the gaming machine is started (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 Steps 150IWS025, S034, and S048 are executed)
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured to be settable to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
Information output means (for example, a portion for executing steps 150IWS047 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. Prepared,
Suggestion execution means
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect) (for example, a step in the effect control CPU 120) 150IWS510-S516, S704-S709, S901-S906)
The suggestion effect execution means includes:
As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) Pre-implying effects, suggesting effects during games, and suggesting effects during big hits)
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (By executing steps 150IWS515, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, the suggestion effect in the game, and the big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode are not executed)
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be settable to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, Decline in interest can be prevented.

Further, the feature unit 150IW includes the following third invention. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for a player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-60546. . Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2017-60546 describes that when the RAM clear switch is operated and the setting key switch is in the ON state, the initial setting 2 is executed and the lottery probability is changed. Further, it is described that the setting key switch is used to validate the setting switch, and a winning lottery probability of a special figure corresponding to the settings 1 to 3 indicated by the setting switch is set. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-60546, a gaming machine configured to be settable to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player is not always appropriate. Processing may not be possible. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, a setting value “1” to a setting value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Operating means (for example, a clear switch);
Process execution means (for example, a game control microcomputer) capable of executing a set value change process for changing a set value based on the operation means being operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started The part that executes steps 150IWS039-S042 in 100),
Based on the fact that the state of the operation means has been switched from the off state to the on state, a determination means that can determine that the operation means has been operated (for example, a part for executing step 150IWS041 in the game control microcomputer 100). Prepared,
The processing execution means can change the setting value based on the determination that the operation means has been operated by the determination means in the setting value changing process (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can perform the step). When 150IWS041 is Y, step 150IWS042 is executed),
The determination means determines whether or not the operation means has been operated by turning on the initial state of the operation means when the set value changing process is started (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has Step 150IWS037 is executed when N in Step 150IWS036)
According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be settable to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, the processing is preferably performed. It can be performed. That is, it is possible to prevent the setting value itself from being changed unintentionally even though the operation means (in this example, the clear switch) is continuously pressed, and the processing is preferably performed. It can be carried out.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention,
Specific information storage means (for example, RAM 122) capable of storing specific information (for example, RAM clear flag) indicating that the operation means has been operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started,
When executing a plurality of processes including a set value changing process, the process executing means executes the process using the specific information a plurality of times (for example, executing steps 150IWS025, S034, and S048 in the game control microcomputer 100). Part to do)
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured to be settable to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention,
The normal initialization process (for example, RAM clear 1 process) is executed based on the operation means being operated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, while the power supply to the gaming machine is started. An initialization processing execution means (for example, a part for executing steps 150IWS015 and S051 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that executes initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 2 processing) at the time of abnormality based on the detection of the abnormality )When,
A first storage area (for example, a clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102) in which stored contents are cleared in the normal initialization process;
A second storage area (for example, a clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102) in which stored contents are cleared in the initialization process at the time of abnormality,
The specific information storage means can store specific information in the second storage area (for example, the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102).
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured to be settable to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention,
First state storage means for storing the state of the previous operation means (for example, the previous clear switch buffer);
Second state storage means (for example, a clear switch buffer) for storing the current state of the operation means,
The determination means can determine that the operation means has been operated based on the stored content of the first state storage means being in an OFF state and the storage content of the second state storage means being in an ON state ( For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 150IWS041),
The first state storage means stores the ON state as the state of the operation means for the first time when the set value change process is started (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 150IWS037).
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured to be settable to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention,
Information output means (for example, a portion for executing steps 150IWS047 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. Prepared,
Suggestion execution means
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect) (for example, a step in the effect control CPU 120) 150IWS510-S516, S704-S709, S901-S906)
The suggestion effect execution means includes:
As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) Pre-implying effects, suggesting effects during games, and suggesting effects during big hits)
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (By executing steps 150IWS515, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, the suggestion effect in the game, and the big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode are not executed)
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be settable to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, Decline in interest can be prevented.

Further, the feature 150IW includes the following fourth invention. In other words, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and can be controlled in an advantageous state based on the set value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a change stop command (set value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and setting before and after change obtained by the change stop command. Based on the value, it is described that display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, giraffe, elephant and lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value specifying command) is not normal. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, there is a risk that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention for solving the problem
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) based on the setting operation. 150IWS042), and
Game control means (for example, a part for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
Information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 150IWS047 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set; ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing an suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect) Steps executed by the CPU 120 at steps 150IWS510-S516, S704-S709, S901-S906)
If the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined set value that is less advantageous for the player among the set values of the plurality of stages. For example, the suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 150IWS513, S707, and S904).
According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a set value command at power-on and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 150IWS047 and S108. To do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the set value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest for the.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, or a big hit by the fourth effect mode as the suggestion effect). The suggestion effect) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect) according to the first effect mode can be executed. It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention,
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using a plurality of types of determination data (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect determination table, a game suggestion effect determination table, a big hit suggestion effect determination table) for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect. A suggestion effect determining means for determining (for example, a portion for executing steps 150IWS511, S513, S515, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, and S906 in the CPU 120 for effect control),
The suggestion effect determining means is
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using determination data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in a set value storage area of the RAM 122). The steps 150IWS511, S705, and S902 are executed based on the set value)
When the set value information is not normally input, the execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined using determination data corresponding to a predetermined set value (for example, the set value “1”) (for example, the effect control CPU 120). (Steps 150IWS513, S707, and S904 are executed based on the set value “1”)
However, according to such a configuration, an increase in data capacity can be prevented.

  In this feature 150IW, “determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect” includes not only determining whether to execute the suggestion effect, but also determining the effect mode of the suggestion effect. is there.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means at least in a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed at different ratios depending on the set value (for example, the suggestion effect before game or It is described that it may be possible to execute an initial appearance effect, etc., and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the game starts, and the game is played from an early time zone. Can be motivated to perform the game, and can enhance the fun of gaming.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is set at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from when the setting is changed until the variable display is executed 30 times)) after the setting value is changed. The suggestion effect can be executed at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-6 (A), (B), FIGS. 20-23 (A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a motivation for playing a game during a predetermined period, and to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-23 (A), (B), etc.)
It is described that it is possible to further include notifying means (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S150IWS517) capable of notifying the information related to the suggested suggestion effect. The suggestive effects executed in the past can be confirmed, and the game entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-29 (A), (B)).
A predetermined effect (for example, an effect effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc .;
Restriction means for restricting execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 20-29 (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the fourth invention,
The setting suggestion execution means can execute the setting suggestion at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-29 (A), (B)).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggesting effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestive effect) It is described that it may be further provided with an accessory effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc., which are difficult to make. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the fourth invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period, interval period, ending period, etc. during the big hit game) varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-5).
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the fourth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, the variation time) regarding the variable display varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 12 of the fourth invention,
An opening / closing body that can be opened and closed, and a regulating member (for example, a security cover 150IW500A / security cover 150IW500B / security cover 150IW500C) that can regulate an operation on the operation unit,
When the opening and closing body is closed, the restriction member maintains the restricted state in which the operation on the operation unit is restricted, and when the opening and closing body is opened, the restricted state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed). In the state in which the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500A is maintained in a state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is restricted by the security cover 150IW500A. The restriction state is released, and the setting key 150IW051 is allowed to be operated (FIGS. 20-2, 20-3, 20-35 to 20-38).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, security is improved.

Further, the feature 150IW includes the fifth invention described below. In other words, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and can be controlled in an advantageous state based on the set value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a change stop command (set value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and setting before and after change obtained by the change stop command. Based on the value, it is described that display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, giraffe, elephant and lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value specifying command) is not normal. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, there is a risk that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) based on the setting operation. 150IWS042), and
Game control means (for example, a part for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
Information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 150IWS047 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set; ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing an suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect) Steps executed by the CPU 120 at steps 150IWS510-S516, S704-S709, S901-S906)
The suggestion effect execution means restricts execution of the suggestion effect when the set value information output from the information output means is not normal (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs N in step 150IWS514 and in S708) N, when N in S905, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect are not executed)
According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a set value command at power-on and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 150IWS047 and S108. To do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the set value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest for the.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, or a big hit by the fourth effect mode as the suggestion effect). The suggestion effect) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect) according to the first effect mode can be executed. It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means at least in a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed at different ratios depending on the set value (for example, the suggestion effect before game or It is described that it may be possible to execute an initial appearance effect, etc., and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the game starts, and the game is played from an early time zone. Can be motivated to perform the game, and can enhance the fun of gaming.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is set at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from when the setting is changed until the variable display is executed 30 times)) after the setting value is changed. The suggestion effect can be executed at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-6 (A), (B), FIGS. 20-23 (A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a motivation for playing a game during a predetermined period, and to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-23 (A), (B), etc.)
It is described that it is possible to further include notifying means (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S150IWS517) capable of notifying the information related to the suggested suggestion effect. The suggestive effects executed in the past can be confirmed, and the game entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-29 (A), (B)).
A predetermined effect (for example, an effect effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc .;
Restriction means for restricting execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 20-29 (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the fifth invention,
The setting suggestion execution means can execute the setting suggestion at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-29 (A), (B)).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggesting effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestive effect) It is described that it may be further provided with an accessory effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc., which are difficult to make. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the fifth invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period, interval period, ending period, etc. during the big hit game) varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-5).
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the fifth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, the variation time) regarding the variable display varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the fifth invention,
An opening / closing body that can be opened and closed, and a regulating member (for example, a security cover 150IW500A / security cover 150IW500B / security cover 150IW500C) that can regulate an operation on the operation unit,
When the opening and closing body is closed, the restriction member maintains the restricted state in which the operation on the operation unit is restricted, and when the opening and closing body is opened, the restricted state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed). In the state in which the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500A is maintained in a state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is restricted by the security cover 150IW500A. The restriction state is released, and the setting key 150IW051 is allowed to be operated (FIGS. 20-2, 20-3, 20-35 to 20-38).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, security is improved.

In addition, the feature 150IW includes the sixth invention described below. In other words, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and can be controlled in an advantageous state based on the set value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a change stop command (set value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and setting before and after change obtained by the change stop command. Based on the value, it is described that display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, giraffe, elephant and lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value specifying command) is not normal. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, there is a risk that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) based on the setting operation. 150IWS042), and
Game control means (for example, a part for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
Information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 150IWS047 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set; ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing an suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect) Steps executed by the CPU 120 at steps 150IWS510-S516, S704-S709, S901-S906)
The suggestion effect execution means includes:
As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) Pre-implying effects, suggesting effects during games, and suggesting effects during big hits)
If the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect without executing the first suggestion effect as the suggestion effect (for example, The effect control CPU 120 executes steps 150IWS515, S709, and S906, so that the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, the suggestion effect in the game, and the big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode are not executed)
According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a set value command at power-on and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 150IWS047 and S108. To do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the set value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest for the.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, or a big hit by the fourth effect mode as the suggestion effect). The suggestion effect) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect) according to the first effect mode can be executed. It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention,
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using a plurality of types of determination data (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect determination table, a game suggestion effect determination table, a big hit suggestion effect determination table) for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect. A suggestion effect determining means for determining (for example, a portion for executing steps 150IWS511, S513, S515, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, and S906 in the CPU 120 for effect control),
The suggestion effect determining means is
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using determination data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in a set value storage area of the RAM 122). The steps 150IWS511, S705, and S902 are executed based on the set value)
When the set value information is not normally input, using dedicated determination data (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the suggestion effect determination table during game, the big hit suggestion effect determination table), The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined (for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the big hit suggestion effect determination table in step 150IWS515. , S709 and S906 are executed)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in games.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means at least in a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed at different ratios depending on the set value (for example, the suggestion effect before game or It is described that it may be possible to execute an initial appearance effect, etc., and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the game starts, and the game is played from an early time zone. Can be motivated to perform the game, and can enhance the fun of gaming.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is set at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from when the setting is changed until the variable display is executed 30 times)) after the setting value is changed. The suggestion effect can be executed at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-6 (A), (B), FIGS. 20-23 (A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a motivation for playing a game during a predetermined period, and to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-23 (A), (B), etc.)
It is described that it is possible to further include notifying means (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S150IWS517) capable of notifying the information related to the suggested suggestion effect. The suggestive effects executed in the past can be confirmed, and the game entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-29 (A), (B)).
A predetermined effect (for example, an effect effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc .;
Restriction means for restricting execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 20-29 (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the sixth invention,
The setting suggestion execution means can execute the setting suggestion at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-29 (A), (B)).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggesting effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestive effect) It is described that it may be further provided with an accessory effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc., which are difficult to make. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the sixth invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period, interval period, ending period, etc. during the big hit game) varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-5).
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the sixth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, the variation time) regarding the variable display varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 12 of the sixth invention,
An opening / closing body that can be opened and closed, and a regulating member (for example, a security cover 150IW500A / security cover 150IW500B / security cover 150IW500C) that can regulate an operation on the operation unit,
When the opening and closing body is closed, the restriction member maintains the restricted state in which the operation on the operation unit is restricted, and when the opening and closing body is opened, the restricted state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed). In the state in which the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500A is maintained in a state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is restricted by the security cover 150IW500A. The restriction state is released, and the setting key 150IW051 is allowed to be operated (FIGS. 20-2, 20-3, 20-35 to 20-38).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, security is improved.

  Note that the feature unit 150IW is configured so that it can be changed to three types of effect modes A to C, and when set to the effect mode A, when the set value information is not normally input, If the suggestion effect is configured to be executed as being set to a predetermined set value having a low advantage for the player (configuration of the fourth invention described above) and is controlled in the effect mode B, the set value When the information is not normally input, it is configured to limit the execution of the suggestive effect (the configuration of the fifth invention described above). When the information is controlled to the effect mode C, the set value information is normally input. If not, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect is configured to be executable as the suggestion effect (configuration of the sixth invention described above). I can't catch it. For example, according to the gaming state, the control method according to any one of the fourth to sixth inventions may be used to switch the suggestion effect. In this case, for example, if the gaming state is the normal state, if the set value information is not normally input, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect as being set to a predetermined set value having a low advantage for the player. The configuration (the configuration of the fourth invention described above), and if the gaming state is the time-short state, the configuration value is limited so that the execution of the suggestion effect is limited when the set value information is not normally input. If the game state is a probable change state, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect when the set value information is not normally input ( (Structure of the above sixth invention)).

  Further, it is not necessary to configure the suggestion effect to be executable by all the control methods of the fourth to sixth inventions described above, and the suggestion effect is configured to be executable using only one of the control methods. Also good.

  In addition, in the case where the set value command itself cannot be received due to reasons such as missing or garbled data, the feature unit 150IW controls the execution of the suggestive effect by the control method of the above fourth to sixth inventions (suggestion Although the case where the production is limited) is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the set value command is received but the received set value command is inconsistent, the suggestion effect may be limited. In this case, for example, every time a set value command is received, the set value indicated by the set value command received on the effect control means side is stored, and then when a new set value command is received, When the set value indicated by the received set value command does not match the previously stored set value, it is determined that a mismatch has occurred, and execution of the suggested effect is performed by the control method of the fourth to sixth inventions. You may make it control (a suggestion effect is restrict | limited).

  Further, the way of making the game different in each of the set values “1” to “3” is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, in the case of an odd-numbered set value such as the set value “1” or “3”, a long game occurs when a long game is likely to occur. It is configured so that the difference from the difficult time is large, and in the case of an even number setting value such as setting value “2”, it is configured so that the likelihood of the extended resort is relatively constant and does not change. A suggestion effect that suggests an odd number may be configured to be executable. In this case, when the set value command cannot be normally received, the execution of the suggestive effect suggesting that the set value is an odd number is controlled by the control method of the fourth to sixth inventions. It may be configured so as to restrict the suggestion effect.

  Moreover, the control method of execution of the suggestion effect when the set value command shown in the fourth to sixth inventions cannot be normally received can be applied to the puzzle effect as the suggestion effect.

The feature 150IW includes the seventh invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the suggestion of the set value is performed only during the variable display, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value,
The suggestion effect execution means at least in a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed, suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect) depending on the set value that has been set A game machine characterized in that it can execute an initial appearance effect, etc., and according to this feature, the player is interested in the state of the game machine before the game starts, Can be motivated to perform the game, and can enhance the fun of gaming.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of performance identification information (for example, decorative symbols),
The suggestion effect execution means displays a suggestion effect (for example, different identification information for effect depending on the set value set) in a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed (for example, It is described that the display of an odd number of initial appearances) may be executable, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect according to the set value when the power supply to the gaming machine is restored after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (for example, FIG. 20). (As shown in -20 (A) and (B), a pre-game suggestion effect determination table with different determination values is used)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a specific suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect during a game or a suggestion effect during a big hit) that suggests a set value that has been set after the variable display is started,
It is described that the specific suggestion effect may be set to have higher reliability with respect to the suggested setting value than the suggestion effect, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion on the display monitor 150IW029 that can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Further, the feature 150IW includes the following eighth invention. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 has a problem that the motivation for playing the game cannot be given effectively, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value,
The suggestion effect execution means is set at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, after the setting is changed and until the variable display is executed 30 times) after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set values being set (see, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A), (B), FIGS. 20-23 (A), (B)).
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a motivation for playing a game during a predetermined period, and to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern;
Variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios depending on whether the set value is changed or not (for example, FIG. 20-6 (A), ( B))
It is described that the variable display execution means may execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is changed and when the set value is not changed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern;
Variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines any one of the plurality of variable display patterns at a different ratio between when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value. (For example, see FIGS. 20-6 (A), (B), etc.),
The variable display executing means can execute variable display using a common background image when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting means. However, according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is that a predetermined condition is established within a predetermined period (for example, a big hit in a specific period, the number of executions of reach effects or pseudo-continuous effects has reached a predetermined number of times, a specific super reach effect) 20), the suggestion effect can be executed (for example, when a big hit occurs within a specific period, the big hit suggestion effect can be executed). (See A) and (B))
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion on the display monitor 150IW029 that can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

In addition, the feature 150IW includes the ninth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the suggestion effect executed in the past cannot be confirmed and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the ninth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-23 (A), (B), etc.)
There is described a gaming machine characterized in that it is further provided with notifying means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 120 for effect control executes step S150IWS517) capable of notifying information on the executed suggestion effect. The suggestive effects executed in the past can be confirmed, and the game entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify the number of times that the suggestion effect has been executed (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S150IWS517).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify the contents of the executed suggestion effect (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S150IWS517).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify the information related to the suggested effect that has been executed while waiting for a customer for which variable display has not been executed (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S150IWS517).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the ninth invention,
Information generating means for generating information (for example, execution history information) related to the executed suggestion effect;
Image generating means for generating a specific image (for example, a two-dimensional code including execution history information) from which the information can be read by the imaging device;
It is described that the specific image may be provided with display means (for example, the image display device 5) that displays the specific image in a form that can be captured by the imaging device. Can be increased.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion on the display monitor 150IW029 that can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature unit 150IW includes the tenth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that if the setting suggestion effect is difficult to be recognized by another effect, the interest may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the tenth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-29 (A), (B)).
A predetermined effect (for example, an effect effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc .;
When the suggestion effect is executed, it further includes a restricting unit that restricts the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the big hit suggestion effect is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted). (See (D))
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the tenth invention,
The restricting means changes the execution timing of at least one of the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect when the execution timing overlaps between the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect (for example, either one is executed during the fanfare period and the other is the ending) Change to run during the period)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the tenth invention,
When the suggestion effect is executed, the restricting unit prohibits the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the big hit suggestion effect is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is prohibited. See FIG. 20-29 (D)). )
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the tenth invention,
When the suggestion effect is executed, the restricting means executes a predetermined effect in an effect mode in which the suggestion effect is not easily recognized (for example, the movable member 150IW101 is operated in an operation mode different from the normal mode (for example, suggesting during a big hit) Control so that it does not stop at the position where it overlaps the dialogue image by the production))
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the tenth invention,
Both the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect for displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5) include display on one display means (for example, the image display device 5),
It is described that the one display means may display the display related to the suggestive effect in preference to the display related to the predetermined effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest. Can do.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the tenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion on the display monitor 150IW029 that can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature unit 150IW includes the following eleventh invention. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that there is a possibility that the interest may be lowered by executing a setting suggestion effect that is not preferable for the player. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eleventh invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
Setting suggestion execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value that has been set
The setting suggestion executing means can execute setting suggestion at a different ratio depending on a set value that has been set (see, for example, FIGS. 20-29 (A), (B)).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggesting effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestive effect) A gaming machine characterized in that it is further provided with a hard-acting effect rendering, a light guide plate rendering, an error display, and the like is described. According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eleventh invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute a predetermined notification (for example, an effect effect) for operating a movable member (for example, the movable member 150IW101). The production effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eleventh invention,
A light-transmitting light guide plate capable of transmitting light (for example, light guide plate 150IW103);
A light emitter provided so that light can be incident from an end face of the light guide plate,
The light guide plate is provided with a reflection portion that reflects light incident on the inside of the light guide plate from the end surface of the light guide plate by the light emitter and emits the light to the front surface of the gaming machine,
The predetermined notification means can execute a predetermined notification (for example, a light guide plate effect) for emitting light to the front surface of the gaming machine from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate by causing the light emitter to emit light. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the production effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the eleventh invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute a predetermined notification for displaying an error, and according to such a configuration, an error can be appropriately notified.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the eleventh invention,
The setting suggestion execution means is a first setting suggestion that suggests that the setting is set to the first set value (for example, a suggestion effect during the big hit of the first effect mode; see FIGS. 20-29 (A) and (B)). The second setting suggestion that suggests that the second setting value, which is more advantageous for the player than the first setting value, is set (for example, a big hit suggestion effect in the third effect mode. FIG. 20-29). A) and (B)) can be executed,
The predetermined notification means can execute the predetermined notification at a higher rate when the first setting suggestion is executed than when the second setting suggestion is executed (see, for example, FIG. 20-29 (E)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the eleventh invention,
Setting suggestion setting means capable of setting a setting suggestion execution ratio (for example, a setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, operation means such as a push button 31B, operation means such as a switch provided in the gaming machine (management The user can change the settings related to the setting suggestion effect)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the eleventh invention,
A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information,
A variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information by rotating a variable display member (for example, a drum-like or belt-like movable body) on which the identification information is arranged;
The variable display device performs a specific operation in the variable display of the first identification information after the set value is changed,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute the predetermined notification at a high rate in the variable display of the first identification information after the set value is changed. Decline in interest can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the eleventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion on the display monitor 150IW029 that can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature unit 150IW also includes the following twelfth invention. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 has a problem that there is a risk that gambling is likely to be too high at a setting with high advantage. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the twelfth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set setting value,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period, interval period, ending period, etc. during the big hit game) differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-5).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the twelfth invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value (see, for example, FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the twelfth invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value that has been set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the twelfth invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using gaming value,
A game value granting means for granting a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means has a first set value (for example, set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value given by the game value giving means rather than the first set value to the magnitude of the game value used in the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) in which the proportion occupied is high,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when the second set value is set than when the first set value is set (for example, FIGS. 20-5 (A) and (B)). reference)
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that there may be provided suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect during a big hit) during a predetermined control period in an advantageous state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the twelfth invention,
Providing production execution means capable of performing production,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, an interval effect, an ending effect, etc.) regardless of a set value that is set during a predetermined control period in an advantageous state. According to such a configuration, the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be determined in advance according to the set value that has been set, and according to such a configuration, the joy is too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to a plurality of advantageous states,
The game control means can be controlled to one of a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) at different ratios based on the set values that are set.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the type of the advantageous state (for example, see FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion on the display monitor 150IW029 that can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature unit 150IW also includes a thirteenth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 has a problem that there is a risk that gambling is likely to be too high at a setting with high advantage. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the thirteenth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set setting value,
The predetermined control period (for example, the variation time) regarding the variable display varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the thirteenth invention,
The variable display period varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the thirteenth invention,
It is described that the period during which the display result of the variable display is displayed may be different depending on the set value that has been set, and according to such a configuration, euphoria becomes too high. This can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the thirteenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using gaming value,
A game value granting means for granting a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means has a first set value (for example, set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value given by the game value giving means rather than the first set value to the magnitude of the game value used in the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) in which the proportion occupied is high,
The predetermined control period for variable display is longer when the second set value is set than when the first set value is set (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the thirteenth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period related to the variable display may be determined in advance according to the set value that has been set, and according to such a configuration, gambling is too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the thirteenth invention,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern;
Variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines any one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different ratios according to a set value (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the thirteenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion on the display monitor 150IW029 that can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

  In the feature section 150IW, the case where the setting values can be set in three stages of the setting values “1” to “3” has been shown. However, the setting is not limited to such a mode. It may be configured to be settable to a value, or may be configured to be settable to a two-stage set value. In this case, for example, the setting value can be set to 6 levels. When the setting value is “1”, the expectation level (reliability) for the jackpot is the lowest, and when the setting value is “6”, the expectation level for the jackpot ( (Reliability) may be the highest.

  In addition, the configuration indicated by the characteristic portion 150IW can be combined with the configuration indicated by other characteristic portions such as the characteristic portion 31AK as appropriate to constitute a gaming machine. For example, in the case of executing the puzzle effect indicated by the feature 150IW, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, or the jackpot suggestion effect, the puzzle effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, or the big hit suggestion When a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the production, the title corresponding to the puzzle production, the pre-game suggestion production, the in-game suggestion production, or the big hit suggestion production may be configured to be able to be notified in the same manner as the feature portion 31AK. .

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General prize opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start opening Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Hit ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM for game control
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing an suggestion effect that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state;
Title informing means capable of informing the title corresponding to the suggestion effect,
The title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the suggestion effect.